WO2022075163A1 - Display device and connecting method - Google Patents

Display device and connecting method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022075163A1
WO2022075163A1 PCT/JP2021/036070 JP2021036070W WO2022075163A1 WO 2022075163 A1 WO2022075163 A1 WO 2022075163A1 JP 2021036070 W JP2021036070 W JP 2021036070W WO 2022075163 A1 WO2022075163 A1 WO 2022075163A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
display
positioning
positioning member
display device
hole
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2021/036070
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
正美 三池
毅文 池之谷
Original Assignee
ソニーグループ株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by ソニーグループ株式会社 filed Critical ソニーグループ株式会社
Priority to JP2022555409A priority Critical patent/JPWO2022075163A1/ja
Publication of WO2022075163A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022075163A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09FDISPLAYING; ADVERTISING; SIGNS; LABELS OR NAME-PLATES; SEALS
    • G09F9/00Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N5/00Details of television systems
    • H04N5/64Constructional details of receivers, e.g. cabinets or dust covers
    • H04N5/645Mounting of picture tube on chassis or in housing

Definitions

  • This technology relates to a display device that displays images and a connection method.
  • Patent Document 1 discloses a display device including a jig for adjusting the position of a substrate on which a display panel is mounted. Specifically, jigs are provided on each of the long side and the short side of the substrate. The eccentric driver is inserted into the jig, and the position of the board is adjusted by rotating the eccentric driver. This makes it possible to fix the substrate at a predetermined reference position (paragraphs [0007] [0022] [0029] to [0038] FIG. 4 of Patent Document 1).
  • a technology capable of displaying a high-quality image is required.
  • an object of the present technology is to provide a display device capable of displaying a high-quality image and a connection method.
  • the display device includes one or more display modules, a support member, and a positioning member.
  • the one or more display modules include a display panel capable of displaying an image.
  • the support member supports the one or more display modules.
  • the positioning member is slidably connected to the support member and defines the position of each of the one or more display modules with respect to the support member.
  • a positioning member that defines the position of each of one or more display modules with respect to the support member is slidably connected to the support member. This makes it possible to display a high-quality image.
  • the support member may slidably support one or more display modules.
  • the display panel may have a display surface for displaying the image.
  • the positioning member may define the position of each of the one or more display modules in a direction parallel to the display surface.
  • the positioning member may have one or more marks configured at predetermined positions.
  • the one or more display modules may be arranged with respect to the support member with reference to the one or more marks.
  • the positioning member may have one or more positioning holes as the one or more marks.
  • each of the one or more display modules may have a pin member and may be arranged with respect to the support substrate so that the pin member fits into the positioning hole.
  • the positioning member may have one or more pin members as the one or more marks.
  • each of the one or more display modules may have a positioning hole and may be arranged with respect to the positioning member so that the positioning hole fits with the pin member.
  • the positioning member may have a through hole.
  • the support member may have a mounting hole configured at a position corresponding to the through hole.
  • the display device may further include a fitting member that penetrates the through hole and is fitted into the mounting hole to slidably connect the positioning member to the support member.
  • the fitting member may be a stepped screw having a head having a size larger than the through hole and a screw portion fitted into the mounting hole.
  • the positioning member may have a slidable range with respect to the support member.
  • the slidable range may be defined by the diameter of the through hole of the positioning member.
  • the display panel may have a display surface for displaying the image.
  • the support member may support the back surface portion of the display module on the side opposite to the display surface. Further, the positioning member may be arranged between the back surface portion and the support member.
  • Each of the one or more display modules may have a magnetic material member which constitutes a part of the back surface portion and is made of a magnetic material.
  • the support substrate may have a magnet arranged at a position corresponding to the position of the magnetic member. Further, the one or more display modules may be supported by the support member by the magnetic force acting between the magnet and the magnetic member.
  • the one or more display modules may be fixed to the positioning member.
  • the one or more display modules and the positioning member may be configured to be integrally slidable with respect to the support substrate.
  • the one or more display modules may be a plurality of display modules.
  • One display unit may be configured by the one or more display modules, the positioning member, and the support member.
  • the display device may further include a plurality of display units.
  • the display device may further include a first connecting member that connects two adjacent support members of the two adjacent display units.
  • the display device may further include a second connecting member that connects two adjacent positioning members of the two adjacent display units.
  • connection method is a connection method for connecting a plurality of display units to each other, and includes a first connection step, a second connection step, and a third connection step.
  • the first connection step connects a plurality of support members included in the plurality of display units to each other.
  • the second connection step connects a plurality of positioning members included in the plurality of display units to each other.
  • the third connection step connects the plurality of support members connected to each other and the plurality of positioning members connected to each other.
  • each of the plurality of display units is slidably connected to one or more display modules including a display panel capable of displaying an image, a support member for supporting the one or more display modules, and the support member. It has a positioning member that defines the position of each of the one or more display modules with respect to the support member.
  • the plurality of positioning members may be connected in a grid pattern along each of a first direction and a second direction orthogonal to the first direction.
  • the second connection step is A step of connecting two or more positioning members along the first direction by using a first jig for fixing the two positioning members so as to be adjacent to each other along the first direction.
  • the second positioning member is fixed so as to be adjacent to the first positioning member along the first direction, and the second positioning member is fixed to the first positioning member along the second direction.
  • a third jig that fixes the third positioning member so as to be adjacent to each other, the first positioning member and the two positioning members that are related to the third positioning member are used. It may include a step of connecting a positioning member to be a positioning member of the above.
  • FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of the enlarged portion shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a display device 100 according to an embodiment of the present technology.
  • the display device 100 is a device capable of displaying an image, and includes a control unit 1 and a display unit 2.
  • the image includes both a still image and a moving image (video).
  • the control unit 1 has hardware necessary for configuring a computer, such as a processor such as a CPU, GPU, and DSP, a memory such as ROM and RAM, and a storage device such as an HDD. For example, when a CPU or the like loads and executes a program according to the present technology recorded in advance in a ROM or the like into a RAM, an image is displayed by the display device 100.
  • the configuration of the control unit 1 is not limited, and any hardware and software may be used. Of course, hardware such as FPGA and ASIC may be used. Further, the position where the control unit 1 is configured is not limited, and may be arbitrarily designed.
  • the program is installed in the display device 100, for example, via various recording media. Alternatively, the program may be installed via the Internet or the like.
  • the type of recording medium on which the program is recorded is not limited, and any computer-readable recording medium may be used. For example, any non-transient storage medium readable by a computer may be used.
  • control unit 1 controls the image display operation by the display unit 2.
  • control unit 1 generates a control signal such as a timing signal or a pixel signal, and supplies the control signal to the display unit 2 via a signal line.
  • the timing signal includes, for example, a horizontal synchronization signal and a vertical synchronization signal.
  • the pixel signal includes, for example, a signal indicating each gradation of R (Red), G (Green), and B (Blue).
  • the control unit 1 controls various operations by the display device 100.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing a configuration example of the display unit 2.
  • the display unit 2 has a plurality of display units 5.
  • Each of the plurality of display units 5 has an image display surface 6 capable of displaying an image.
  • the plurality of display units 5 are installed so that the image display surfaces 6 are arranged in a two-dimensional grid pattern. This makes it possible to display an image on a large screen.
  • the control unit 1 controls the operation of each display unit 5 so that a desired image such as one image is displayed by the image display surfaces 6 of the plurality of display units 5.
  • the left-right direction is the X direction and the vertical direction is the Y direction.
  • the description will be given with the depth direction (direction perpendicular to the image display surface 6) as the Z direction.
  • the direction of the arrow in the X direction is described as the right side, and the opposite side is described as the left side.
  • the direction of the arrow in the Y direction is described as the upper side, and the opposite side is described as the lower side.
  • the direction of the arrow in the Z direction is described as the rear side, and the opposite side is described as the front side.
  • the direction in which the display device 100 is used is not limited.
  • a total of nine display units are arranged, three in the X direction (horizontal direction) and three in the Y direction (vertical direction).
  • the number of the plurality of display units 5 is not limited. Further, even when there is only one display unit 5, this technique can be applied. That is, this technique is applicable when one or more display units 5 are arranged.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing an outline of the display unit 5.
  • FIG. 3 schematically shows a configuration example when the display unit 5 is viewed from the Y direction.
  • the display unit 5 has a plurality of display modules 9, a unit board 10, and a positioning member 11.
  • three display modules are arranged in the left-right direction, that is, in the X direction.
  • the number of display modules 9 included in the display unit 5 is not limited.
  • the present technology can be applied even when there is only one display module 9. That is, this technique is applicable when one or more display modules 9 are arranged.
  • Each of the plurality of display modules 9 includes a display panel 12 (see FIG. 4) capable of displaying an image.
  • the display panel 12 has a display surface capable of displaying an image.
  • any display device using a liquid crystal display, EL (Electro-Luminescence), or the like is adopted.
  • the plurality of display modules 9 are arranged so that their display planes are parallel to the XY plane direction. Further, the plurality of display modules 9 are installed so that the plurality of display panels 12 are arranged in a two-dimensional grid pattern.
  • the display surface of the display panel 12 arranged in a two-dimensional grid pattern constitutes an image display surface 6 of one display unit 5.
  • the unit board 10 supports a plurality of display modules 9.
  • the back surface portion 13 of the display module 9 is supported by the unit substrate 10.
  • the back surface 13 of the display module 9 is a surface opposite to the display surface.
  • at least a part of the back surface portion 13 of the display module 9 may be in contact with the unit substrate 10.
  • the entire back surface portion 13 of the display module 9 may be connected to the positioning member 11, and the positioning member 11 may be supported by the unit substrate 10.
  • the plurality of display modules 9 are supported by the unit substrate 10 via the positioning member 11.
  • the unit substrate 10 is made of a metal such as aluminum.
  • the material of the unit substrate 10 is not limited, and any material may be used.
  • the unit substrate 10 corresponds to an embodiment of a support member that supports one or more display modules according to the present technology.
  • the positioning member 11 is arranged between the back surface portion 13 of the display module 9 and the unit substrate 10.
  • the positioning member 11 is a member that defines the position of each of the plurality of display modules 9 with respect to the unit substrate 10. In the present embodiment, the position in the direction parallel to the display surface of the display panel 12 (XY plane direction) is defined. That is, the positioning member 11 defines the positions of the display modules 9 in the X and Y directions.
  • the positioning member 11 is slidably connected to the unit substrate 10. That is, the positioning member 11 is not completely fixed to the unit substrate, but is slidably connected within a predetermined range in the XY plane direction. Further, the plurality of display modules 9 are also slidably supported by the unit substrate 10 in the XY plane direction. Of course, the plurality of display modules 9 and the positioning member 11 are appropriately connected to the unit substrate 10 to the extent that the display of the image by the display unit 5 does not cause any trouble. On the other hand, a plurality of display modules 9 and positioning members 11 are connected so that they can be slid slightly with respect to the unit substrate 10.
  • the positioning member 11 is formed of, for example, carbon or the like. In addition, the material of the positioning member 11 is not limited, and any material may be used.
  • FIG. 4 to 6 are perspective views showing a specific configuration example of the display unit 5.
  • FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the display unit 5 when viewed from the upper right on the front side.
  • FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the display unit 5 when viewed from the upper right on the front side, and is a view when a plurality of display modules 9 are removed.
  • FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the display unit 5 when viewed from the upper left side on the rear side.
  • the display unit 5 includes a plurality of display modules 9, a unit board 10, and a positioning member 11.
  • the overall shape of each of the plurality of display modules 9, the unit substrate 10, and the positioning member 11 is a flat plate shape. Further, when viewed from the Z direction, the entire outer shapes of the plurality of display modules 9, the unit substrate 10, and the positioning member 11 have rectangular shapes that are substantially equal to each other.
  • a display unit 5 is configured by assembling a plurality of display modules 9, a unit board 10, and a positioning member 11 along the Z direction.
  • the display module 9 has a rectangular display panel 12 having a lateral direction as a lateral direction and a vertical direction as a longitudinal direction.
  • the outer shape also has a rectangular shape similar to that of the display panel 12.
  • the unit board 10 is configured with a support mechanism for supporting each of the eight display modules 9.
  • the support mechanism has four contact reference planes and four magnets for one display module 9. These elements will be described in detail later.
  • the unit substrate 10 is formed with mounting holes for holding the positioning member 11 slidably.
  • the positioning member 11 has an outer frame portion 16, a central rib portion 17, and three partition rib portions 18.
  • the outer frame portion 16 is a rectangular frame portion having a hollow inside.
  • the central rib portion 17 extends in the X direction at the central position in the Y direction and is configured on the inner side of the outer frame portion 16.
  • the three partition rib portions 18 extend in the X direction so as to be arranged at equal intervals in the Y direction, and are configured on the inner side of the outer frame portion.
  • the outer frame portion 16, the central rib portion 17, and the three partition rib portions 18 constitute eight openings 19 corresponding to the eight display modules 9. In each opening 19, a portion located on the peripheral edge of the opening 19 is a portion corresponding to the peripheral edge of the back surface portion 13 of the display module 9.
  • the positioning member 11 is connected to the unit substrate 10. As described above, the positioning member 11 is slidably connected to the unit substrate 10. Therefore, a through hole is formed in the positioning member 11. Further, a stepped screw is used as a member for slidably connecting the positioning member 11 to the unit substrate 10.
  • FIGS. 7 to 9 The connection between the positioning member 11 and the unit substrate 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 9.
  • the illustration is centered on the portion related to the connection between the positioning member 11 and the unit substrate 10, and the portion not related to the connection is not shown in some parts. That is, in each figure, when explaining various features of the display device 100 and the display unit 5 according to the present technology, in order to make it easy to understand the features to be explained, the parts related to the other features are illustrated. May be omitted. Further, when a plurality of drawings are referred to when explaining a certain feature, the shapes, positions, and the like may be slightly different in each drawing. In such a case, each of the figures can be established as an embodiment according to the present technology.
  • FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view showing an enlarged upper right portion of the display unit 5 when the display unit 5 is viewed from the front side.
  • FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the enlarged portion shown in FIG. 7 when viewed from the rear side.
  • FIG. 9 is a part of a cross-sectional view when cut in a plane (XZ plane) perpendicular to the Y direction so as to pass through the center of the stepped screw 22 in the enlarged portion shown in FIG. 7.
  • the positioning member 11 and the unit board 10 are connected by the stepped screw 22.
  • the stepped screw 22 penetrates the through hole 23 formed in the positioning member 11 and is fitted into the mounting hole 24 formed in the unit substrate 10, whereby the positioning member 11 and the unit substrate 10 are formed. Is connected.
  • a plurality of through holes 23 are formed in the positioning member 11.
  • a circular through hole 23 is formed.
  • the specific shape of the through hole 23 is not limited.
  • 15 through holes 23 are formed for one positioning member 11.
  • the through hole 23 is formed in the outer frame portion 16 of the positioning member 11 and the three partition rib portions 18.
  • two through holes 23 are formed on the left side of the rectangular outer frame portion 16.
  • the two through holes 23 are formed at a position above and below the central rib portion 17 in the Y direction, respectively.
  • a total of two through holes 23 are formed, one at a position above the central rib portion 17 and one at a position below the central rib portion 17.
  • the partition rib portion 18 located on the leftmost side is formed with four through holes 23.
  • Two through holes 23 are formed at a position above the central rib portion 17 and two at a position below the central rib portion 17 in the Y direction.
  • one of the two through holes 23 formed at the upper position is configured close to the upper side of the outer frame portion 16.
  • one of the two through holes 23 formed below is configured close to the lower side of the outer frame portion 16.
  • four through holes 23 are formed on the partition rib portion 18 located on the far right side.
  • Three through holes 23 are formed in the partition rib portion 18 located at the center. The three through holes 23 are formed one by one in the vicinity of the upper side of the outer frame portion 16, the vicinity of the lower side of the outer frame portion 16, and the vicinity of the central rib portion 17.
  • through holes 23 are formed in the vicinity of the right end of the upper side of the outer frame portion 16 and in the vicinity of the upper side of the partition rib portion 18 on the right side.
  • a plurality of mounting holes 24 are formed in the unit substrate 10.
  • the mounting hole 24 is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 23 formed in the positioning member 11.
  • the mounting hole 24 is formed at a position centered on the through hole 23.
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and the mounting hole 24 may be formed at a position offset from the center of the through hole 23.
  • the mounting hole 24 is formed with a screw thread for fitting with the stepped screw 22.
  • 15 mounting holes 24 are formed at positions corresponding to the through holes 23 of the positioning member 11 with respect to the unit substrate 10. Also in the unit substrate 10 shown in FIG. 7, two mounting holes 24 are formed at positions corresponding to the two through holes 23.
  • the number and positions of the mounting holes 24 formed in the unit substrate 10 may be arbitrarily designed according to the number and positions of the through holes 23.
  • the stepped screw 22 has a head portion 27, a stepped portion 28, and a threaded portion 29.
  • the stepped screw 22 is attached so as to face from the front side to the rear side.
  • the head 27 has a disk shape.
  • the head 27 has a circular front surface and a circular rear surface.
  • the step portion 28 has a cylindrical shape.
  • the step 28 is connected to the center of the rear surface of the head 27 so as to extend to the rear side.
  • the size of the step 28 in the Z direction is designed according to the thickness of the positioning member 11.
  • the threaded portion 29 is connected to the center of the rear end surface of the stepped portion 28 so as to extend to the rear side.
  • the screw portion 29 is configured with a screw thread so as to fit into the screw thread of the mounting hole 24 formed in the unit substrate 10.
  • the diameter of the head 27, the diameter of the stepped portion 28, and the diameter of the threaded portion 29 decrease in this order. Therefore, a step is formed at the connecting portion between the step portion 28 and the screw portion 29.
  • the diameter of the step 28 is configured to be larger than the diameter of the mounting hole 24 into which the thread 29 is inserted and fitted. Therefore, when the stepped screw 22 is rotated and fitted to the mounting hole 24, the peripheral portion of the mounting hole 24 (that is, the unit substrate 10) comes into contact with the rear end surface of the stepped portion 28.
  • the head 27 has a size larger than that of the through hole 23. Specifically, the diameter of the head 27 is configured to be larger than the diameter of the through hole 23 formed in the positioning member 11.
  • the stepped screw 22 is made of a metal material such as iron. Of course, the material of the stepped screw 22 is not limited, and any material may be used.
  • the stepped screw 22 corresponds to one embodiment of the fitting member according to the present technology, which is fitted into the mounting hole through the through hole and slidably connects the positioning member to the support member.
  • the stepped screw 22 penetrates the through hole 23 formed on the positioning member 11 and is fitted into the mounting hole 24 formed on the unit substrate 10.
  • the positioning member 11 is sandwiched and fixed between the head portion 27 of the stepped screw 22 and the unit substrate 10.
  • the stepped screw 22 is fitted into the mounting hole 24 so that the positioning member 11 can slide in the X direction and the Y direction with respect to the unit substrate 10.
  • the positioning member 11 can be connected to the unit substrate 10 to the extent that the positioning member 11 is not too fixed and the fixing force is not too weak. ..
  • the amount of rotation when fitting the stepped screw 22 into the mounting hole 24 may be adjusted.
  • the slidable range of the positioning member 11 with respect to the unit substrate 10 may be defined.
  • the slidable range of the positioning member 11 can be defined by the diameter of the through hole 23 formed in the positioning member 11. If the diameter of the through hole 23 is increased, the slidable range can be increased. Further, if the diameter of the through hole 23 is reduced, the slidable range can be reduced. In this way, the slidable range may be defined by the diameter (which may be a radius) of the through hole 23.
  • an arbitrary configuration for defining the slidable range of the positioning member 11 may be adopted.
  • An urging member such as a spring may be used to slidably connect the positioning member 11 to the unit substrate 10.
  • the stepped screw 22 is urged toward the unit board 10 by the urging member.
  • the urging force of the urging member it is possible to adjust the pressing force on which the head 27 of the stepped screw 22 presses the positioning member 11.
  • any configuration may be adopted in order to set the pressing force to an appropriate size.
  • the unit substrate 10 is formed of a metal such as aluminum.
  • the positioning member 11 is formed of carbon or the like. Metals such as aluminum have a higher coefficient of thermal expansion than carbon and the like, and the rate of change in surface area with temperature changes is higher. Therefore, for example, when the temperature of the space in which the display device 100 is installed rises, the surface area of the unit substrate 10 increases significantly as compared with the surface area of the positioning member 11. Even when the unit substrate 10 is deformed due to such a difference in the coefficient of thermal expansion, the positioning member 11 slides and slides relative to the unit substrate 10. This makes it possible to suppress the stress generated by the deformation of the unit substrate 10 from being applied to the positioning member 11.
  • the slidable range of the positioning member 11 may be set in consideration of the amount of deformation of the unit substrate 10. For example, the diameter of the through hole 23 shown in FIG. 9 is increased to increase the slidable range. As a result, even when the unit substrate 10 is significantly deformed, it is possible to suppress the influence of the deformation on the positioning member 11. Further, when the amount of deformation of the unit substrate 10 is expected to be small, the diameter of the through hole 23 may be set to be small.
  • the positioning member 11 is slidably connected to the unit substrate 10.
  • a plurality of display modules 9 are mounted with reference to the positioning member 11 connected to the unit board 10.
  • eight display modules 9 are mounted at the positions of eight openings 19 formed in the positioning member 11.
  • FIG. 10 is a part of a cross-sectional view when the display unit 5 is viewed from the front side and the upper side portion of the display unit 5 is cut by a plane (XZ plane) perpendicular to the Y direction. Further, FIG. 10 corresponds to a cross-sectional view of the vicinity of the upper right corner of the display unit 5.
  • FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the cross section shown in FIG. 10 when viewed from the rear side.
  • FIG. 12 is a perspective view showing a configuration example of the back surface portion 13 of the display module 9.
  • FIG. 12 corresponds to a view of the upper right corner of the upper right display module 9 of the eight display modules 9 shown in FIG. 4 as viewed from the rear side.
  • the unit board 10 is configured with a support mechanism for supporting the display module 9.
  • the support mechanism is configured for each display module 9. Specifically, it is configured at a position corresponding to the peripheral edge portion of each opening 19 and supports each display module 9.
  • the support mechanism has four magnets 33 and four contact reference surfaces 34.
  • the four magnets 33 are embedded in the unit substrate 10 at positions corresponding to the four corners of the opening 19. Therefore, a total of 32 magnets 33 are installed on the unit substrate 10.
  • the four contact reference surfaces 34 are also configured at positions corresponding to the four corners of the opening 19. Therefore, the magnet 33 and the contact reference surface 34 are configured at positions close to each other.
  • the unit substrate 10 has an outer frame portion 35 and a bottom surface portion 36.
  • the outer frame portion 35 has a rectangular shape.
  • the bottom surface portion 36 has a planar shape perpendicular to the Z direction, and is connected to the rear side of the outer frame portion 35.
  • the space on the inner side of the outer frame portion 35, and the space on the front side of the bottom surface portion 36 is a space for supporting the plurality of display modules 9.
  • a support convex portion 37 extending forward along the Z direction is configured.
  • the plurality of support convex portions 37 are configured at positions corresponding to the four corners of each opening 19.
  • the plurality of support convex portions 37 are elements included in the support mechanism.
  • the magnet 33 is embedded in the outer frame portion 35 at positions corresponding to the four corners of each opening 19. Further, the magnet 33 is embedded in the support convex portion 37 configured at the position corresponding to the four corners of each opening 19. Further, a contact reference surface 34 is formed on the front surface of the outer frame portion 35 at positions corresponding to the four corners of each opening 19 (positions in the vicinity of the magnet 33). Further, a contact reference surface 34 is formed on the front surface of the support convex portion 37 configured at positions corresponding to the four corners of each opening 19. The height and flatness of the contact reference surface 34 from the bottom surface portion 36 are precisely machined. The plurality of contact reference surfaces 34 formed on the outer frame portion 35 and the support convex portion 37 are formed on the same plane with high accuracy.
  • the positioning member 11 has one or more marks configured at predetermined positions for each display module 9.
  • the one or more marks are reference marks when the display module 9 is arranged with respect to the unit board 10.
  • a positioning hole 40 is formed in the peripheral portion of the opening 19 as a mark.
  • positioning holes 40 are formed at the four corners of the peripheral edge of the opening 19.
  • positioning holes 40 are formed at both ends of one side of the peripheral edge portion of the opening 19.
  • Other configurations may be adopted.
  • the positioning member 11 has four contact through holes 41 for each display module 9. The contact through holes 41 are formed at the four corners of the opening 19 at positions corresponding to the four contact reference surfaces 34 of the unit substrate 10.
  • the positioning member 11 When the positioning member 11 is connected to the unit board 10, the four contact reference surfaces 34 of the unit board 10 can be seen from the four contact through holes 41. On the other hand, when the positioning member 11 is connected to the unit substrate 10, the positions of the four magnets 33 embedded in the unit substrate 10 are covered by the positioning member 11.
  • the back surface portion 13 of the display module 9 includes a magnetic material member 44, a positioning pin 45, and a contact convex portion 46.
  • the magnetic member 44 is installed at the four corners of the back surface portion 13.
  • the magnetic member 44 is installed at a position corresponding to the four magnets 33 embedded in the unit substrate 10.
  • the positioning pin 45 is installed at a position corresponding to the positioning hole 40 formed in the positioning member 11.
  • a reinforcing member 47 is provided on the rear side of the display panel 12.
  • the display panel 12 is formed of a low-strength material such as glass. By connecting the reinforcing member 47, the strength of the display panel 12 is increased, and the destruction due to the impact is prevented.
  • the reinforcing member 47 is formed of a highly rigid material such as carbon. Of course, the specific configuration such as the material and shape of the reinforcing member 47 is not limited.
  • the positioning pin 45 is fixed to the reinforcing member 47.
  • the positioning pin 45 is fixed to the reinforcing member 47 by adhesion using an adhesive or the like.
  • any fixing method capable of fixing the positioning pin 45 to the reinforcing member 47 may be adopted.
  • the positioning pin 45 corresponds to one embodiment of the pin member according to the present technology.
  • the contact reference surface 48 is formed at the rear end of the contact convex portion 46.
  • the four contact convex portions 46 are formed at positions corresponding to the four contact through holes 41 formed in the positioning member 11. That is, the four contact convex portions 46 are formed at positions corresponding to the four contact reference surfaces 34 of the unit substrate 10.
  • the height of the abutting convex portion 46 is precisely machined. That is, the position of the contact reference surface 48 in the Z direction is precisely defined. Further, the flatness of the contact reference surface 48 is also precisely machined. In each display module 9, the plurality of contact reference surfaces 48 are formed on the same plane with high accuracy.
  • Each of the eight display modules 9 is arranged with respect to the unit substrate 10 so that the positioning pin 45 fits into the positioning hole 40 formed in the positioning member 11.
  • the four magnets 33 embedded in the unit substrate 10 and the four magnetic material members 44 arranged on the back surface portion 13 of the display module 9 are attracted by magnetic force.
  • the magnet 33 and the magnetic member 44 are attracted to each other so as to sandwich the positioning member 11.
  • each of the eight display modules 9 is supported by the unit substrate 10 by the magnetic force acting between the magnet 33 and the magnetic member 44. Therefore, the display module 9 is slidably connected to the unit substrate 10 in the X direction and the Y direction.
  • the magnetic material any metal material such as iron may be used. Of course, other magnetic materials may be used.
  • a magnet may be used to be attracted to the magnet 33 embedded in the unit substrate.
  • each display module 9 comes into contact with each other.
  • the contact reference surface 34 and the contact reference surface 48 abut on each other to define the position of each display module 9 with respect to the unit substrate 10 in the Z direction. Since the height and flatness of the contact reference surface 34 and the contact reference surface 48 are precisely defined, each display module 9 is positioned with high accuracy in the Z direction. Further, the display surface of each display module 9 is also aligned in the XY plane direction with high accuracy. Of course, the heights of the contact reference surface 34 and the contact reference surface 48 may be arbitrarily designed.
  • the positioning pin 45 and the positioning hole 40 are fitted without forming a gap.
  • the positioning member 11 and the plurality of display modules 9 can be integrally slid with respect to the unit substrate 10.
  • the length of the positioning pin 45 is set so that a slight gap is formed between the positioning pin 45 and the unit substrate 10. That is, the length of the positioning pin 45 along the Z direction is set so that the tip of the positioning pin 45 does not abut on the front surface of the unit substrate 10 when the display unit 5 is assembled.
  • the length of the positioning pin 45 is determined within a range in which positioning in the X direction and the Y direction is possible.
  • the display module 9 is fixed to the positioning member 11 by fitting the positioning pin 45 and the positioning hole 40. Then, the display module 9 and the positioning member 11 are integrally slidable with respect to the unit substrate 10. Therefore, for example, when the unit substrate 10 is deformed due to a temperature change or the like, the plurality of display modules 9 and the positioning member 11 can be integrated and slide relative to the unit substrate 10. be. This makes it possible to suppress the stress generated by the deformation of the unit substrate 10 from being applied to the plurality of display modules 9 and the positioning member 11.
  • any configuration may be adopted as the configuration of the mark formed on the positioning member 11.
  • the positioning pin 45 may be formed on the positioning member 11.
  • the positioning hole 40 may be formed in the display module 9.
  • each display module 9 is arranged with respect to the unit substrate 10 so that the positioning hole 40 fits with the positioning pin 45 formed on the positioning member 11. This makes it possible to accurately position the display module 9 in the X direction and the Y direction.
  • any configuration may be adopted.
  • the positioning member 11 and the display module 9 may be connected by fastening with a fastening member such as a screw, bonding with an adhesive, welding, or the like. Even in this case, the display module 9 and the positioning member 11 are integrally slidable with respect to the unit substrate 10. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the stress generated by the deformation of the unit substrate 10 from being applied to the plurality of display modules 9 and the positioning member 11. For example, by appropriately designing the mounting position of the fastening member, the coating position of the adhesive, and the like, it is possible to connect the display module 9 to the positioning member 11 while positioning the display module 9 in the X and Y directions. Is.
  • a screw hole, a recess to which an adhesive is applied, or the like can be made to function as an embodiment of a mark according to the present technology.
  • the reference mark is not limited, and any member, an adhesive point, or the like can be used as a mark.
  • the method of arranging the display module 9 with reference to the mark configured on the positioning member is not limited, and any method may be adopted.
  • Display module The outline of the display module 9 will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 13, a configuration example when the display module 9 is viewed from the Y direction is schematically shown.
  • the display module 9 has a display panel 12, a support board 51, and an adjustment mechanism 52.
  • the display panel 12 has a display surface 53 and a rear surface 54 on the opposite side thereof.
  • the support substrate 51 supports the display panel 12.
  • the support substrate 51 supports the rear surface 54 of the display panel 12.
  • the reinforcing member 47 is connected to the rear surface 54 of the display panel 12.
  • the support substrate 51 supports the display panel 12 via the reinforcing member 47.
  • a contact convex portion 46 having a contact reference surface 48 is formed on the rear surface 54 of the support substrate 51.
  • the support substrate 51 is made of a metal such as aluminum.
  • the material of the support substrate 51 is not limited, and any material may be used.
  • the adjusting mechanism 52 is connected to each of the display panel 12 and the support board 51, and the relative distance of the display panel 12 to the support board 51 can be adjusted.
  • the adjusting mechanism 52 makes it possible to adjust the distance from the contact reference surface 48 formed on the support substrate 51 to the display surface 53 of the display panel 12.
  • the contact with 34 defines the position of the display module 9 with respect to the unit substrate 10 in the Z direction.
  • the adjustment mechanism 52 further makes it possible to adjust the position of the display panel 12 with respect to the support substrate 51 in the Z direction. As a result, it is possible to adjust the position, inclination, and the like of the display surface 53 of the display panel 12 in the Z direction. As a result, as shown in FIG. 4, when a plurality of display panels 12 are arranged side by side, it is possible to align the display surfaces 53 on the same surface.
  • FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the display module 9 when viewed from the front side.
  • FIG. 15 is a part of a cross-sectional view when the upper side of the display module 9 is cut along a plane (XZ plane) perpendicular to the Y direction so as to pass through the center of the adjusting mechanism 52.
  • FIG. 15 is a cross-sectional view near the position of the upper left corner of the display module 9.
  • FIG. 16 is an exploded perspective view of the display module 9 when viewed from the rear side.
  • FIG. 16 is an exploded perspective view of a portion corresponding to the upper right portion of the display module 9.
  • the outer shapes of the display panel 12 and the support substrate 51 are rectangular shapes substantially equal to each other. Therefore, the peripheral edge portion 57 of the display panel 12 is supported by the peripheral edge portion 58 of the support substrate 51.
  • 14 adjusting mechanisms 52 are configured between the peripheral edge portion 57 of the display panel 12 and the peripheral edge portion 58 of the support substrate 51.
  • a mounting mechanism 59 for mounting the adjusting mechanism 52 is configured on the peripheral edge portion 58 of the support substrate 51.
  • the mounting mechanism 59 has a mounting recess 60 having a concave shape toward the front side when the support board 51 is viewed from the rear side.
  • the outer shape is circular.
  • the mounting recess 60 has a flat plate portion 61 that is the bottom surface of the recess, and a side wall portion 62 that extends rearward from the flat plate portion 61.
  • the flat plate portion 61 is a flat plate-shaped member arranged in parallel with the display surface 53. Further, in the mounting recess 60 of the mounting mechanism 59, a through hole 63 for the adjusting mechanism for mounting the adjusting mechanism 52 is formed.
  • the mounting mechanism 59 is formed at the following 14 locations. 4 corners (4 locations) of peripheral edge 58 Two short sides (upper side and lower side) of the peripheral edge 58, two places on the center side of both ends (four places in total) Two long sides (left side and right side) of the peripheral portion 58, three places from both ends to the center side (six places in total) Focusing on each of the short side and the long side of the peripheral edge portion 58, the mounting mechanism 59 is formed at one or more positions between both ends. Both ends of the short side and the long side correspond to the positions of the four corners of the peripheral edge portion 58.
  • the two positions on the center side of the two short sides are two positions substantially in the middle between both ends and the center.
  • the three positions on the center side are one position in the center and two positions approximately in the middle between both ends and the center.
  • the position of the through hole 63 for the adjustment mechanism corresponds to the position of the adjustment mechanism 52.
  • the position and number of adjustment mechanisms 52 are not limited to one display module 9, and may be arbitrarily designed.
  • the adjusting mechanism 52 has a male screw stud 66, a female screw 67, a torsion coil spring 68, a lid member 69, and a lid set screw 70.
  • the male screw stud 66 has a head 71 and a male screw portion 72 on which a thread is formed.
  • the male screw portion 72 is connected to the center of the head 71.
  • the head 71 of the male screw stud 66 is installed on a reinforcing member 47 connected to the rear side of the display panel 12 so that the male screw portion 72 extends to the rear side.
  • the male screw stud 66 is connected to the reinforcing member 47 so that the central axis coincides with the center of the through hole 63 for the adjusting mechanism.
  • the head 71 of the male screw stud 66 is fixed to the reinforcing member 47, for example, by fastening with a fastening member such as a screw.
  • a fastening member such as a screw
  • any fixing method capable of fixing the male screw stud 66 to the reinforcing member 47 such as adhesion using an adhesive or welding, may be adopted.
  • the male screw stud 66 is made of a metal material such as iron. Of course, the material of the male screw stud 66 is not limited, and any material may be used.
  • the male screw stud 66 corresponds to an embodiment of a connecting member attached to a display panel and connected to a screw according to the present technology.
  • the female screw 67 has a head 73 and a hollow cylindrical portion 74.
  • the hollow portion of the cylindrical portion 74 is configured as a screw hole that engages with the male screw portion 72.
  • a through hole 75 is also formed in the central portion of the head 73, and is connected to the screw hole.
  • the female screw 67 is arranged inside the mounting recess 60 so that the cylindrical portion 74 extends toward the front side.
  • the female screw 67 is arranged so that the central axis coincides with the center of the through hole 63 for the adjusting mechanism, that is, coincides with the central axis of the male screw stud 66.
  • the head 73 of the female screw 67 is attached to the front surface of the lid member 69.
  • the rotating member 76 is connected to the female screw 67 from the rear side of the lid member 69 so as to sandwich the lid member 69.
  • the front end portion of the rotating member 76 is inserted and fixed into the through hole 75 of the head 73 of the female screw 67.
  • the female screw 67 and the rotating member 76 are configured to be rotatable with respect to the lid member 69.
  • a groove for example, a plus groove or a minus groove
  • the user can rotate the female screw 67 by rotating the rotating member 76 using a screwdriver or the like.
  • the female screw 67 is made of a metal material such as iron.
  • the material of the female screw 67 is not limited, and any material may be used.
  • the female screw 67 corresponds to an embodiment of a screw attached to a support substrate according to the present technology.
  • the lid member 69 is connected to the support substrate 51 so that the female screw 67 to be mounted on the front side is arranged at the center of the mounting recess 60.
  • the lid member 69 is connected to the support substrate 51 by the lid set screw 70 at two predetermined positions around the mounting recess 60.
  • FIG. 15 when the lid member 69 of the adjusting mechanism 52 configured at the four corners of the support substrate 51 and the lid member 69 of the adjusting mechanism 52 configured at a position adjacent to the lid member 69 are viewed from the Z direction.
  • the shapes of are different from each other. As described above, each adjusting mechanism 52 may have a different shape or the like of each member constituting the adjusting mechanism 52.
  • the lid member 69 is a member corresponding to the magnetic material member 44 shown in FIG. 12 and the like. That is, in the present embodiment, the lid member 69 and the magnet 33 embedded in the unit substrate 10 are attracted to each other. In this way, the member constituting the adjusting mechanism 52 may also be used as a member for connecting the display unit 5 to the unit substrate 10. This makes it possible to reduce the number of parts and simplify the configuration.
  • the lid member 69 is made of a metal material such as iron. Of course, the material of the lid member 69 is not limited, and any material may be used.
  • the lid member 69 corresponds to an embodiment of a fixing member according to the present technology, which holds a screw rotatably and is fixed to a support substrate.
  • the female screw 67 is rotatably attached to the support substrate 51 via the lid member 69.
  • the torsion coil spring 68 is arranged between the flat plate portion 61 and the lid member 69 in the mounting recess 60. One end of the torsion coil spring 68 is connected to the flat plate portion 61, and the other end is connected to the head 73 of the female screw 67. Therefore, the torsion coil spring 68 urges the female screw 67 toward the lid member 69. This makes it possible to prevent backlash between the male screw portion 72 and the female screw 67.
  • the specific material and shape of the torsion coil spring 68 are not limited.
  • the torsion coil spring 68 corresponds to one embodiment of the urging member according to the present technology, which is arranged between the fixing member and the flat plate portion and urges the screw in the direction of the fixing member.
  • the member for urging the female screw 67 in the direction of the lid member 69 is not limited to the torsion coil spring 68.
  • a disc spring, rubber, or the like may be used, and the female screw 67 may be urged in the direction of the lid member 69.
  • the method for encouraging is not limited, and any method may be adopted.
  • the male screw stud 66 and the female screw 67 are connected to each other via a through hole 63 for an adjusting mechanism.
  • the male screw portion 72 of the male screw stud 66 penetrates the through hole 63 and extends to the rear side.
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and the cylindrical portion 74 of the female screw 67 may be configured to penetrate the through hole 63.
  • a through hole 77 for the positioning pin through which the positioning pin 45 penetrates is formed on the peripheral edge of the support substrate 51.
  • the through hole 77 for the positioning pin is formed at a position where the positioning pin 45 is mounted.
  • the adjusting mechanism 52 adjusts the relative distance of the display panel 12 with respect to the support substrate 51 in the direction perpendicular to the display surface.
  • the adjustment of the relative distance of the display panel 12 with respect to the support substrate 51 in the direction perpendicular to the display surface 53 is adjusted, the height of the display panel 12 with respect to the support substrate 51 is adjusted, or the height of the display panel 12 is simply adjusted. May be expressed as.
  • the height of the display panel 12 is adjusted by the relative rotation of the female screw 67 with respect to the male screw stud 66.
  • the rotating member 76 is rotated by using a tool such as a screwdriver. Since the rotating member 76 and the female screw 67 are connected to each other, when the rotating member 76 is rotated, the female screw 67 also rotates integrally.
  • the male screw stud 66 is fixed to the reinforcing member 47 so as not to rotate. Therefore, by rotating the female screw 67, the fitting position (fitting depth) between the male screw stud 66 and the female screw 67 is adjusted. Therefore, the front end portion of the male screw stud 66 moves to the front side or the rear side relative to the female screw 67.
  • the male screw stud 66 moves forward.
  • the male screw stud 66 moves to the rear side.
  • the relationship between the rotation direction of the female screw 67 and the direction of movement of the male screw stud 66 along the Z direction may be opposite.
  • the female screw 67 is fixed to the support substrate 51 via the lid member 69. Further, the male screw stud 66 is fixed to the reinforcing member 47. Therefore, when the male screw stud 66 moves forward or backward along the Z direction, the relative distance of the display panel 12 with respect to the support substrate 51 in the direction perpendicular to the display surface is adjusted.
  • the display surface 53 of the display panel 12 can be moved backward by rotating the female screw 67 clockwise.
  • the female screw 67 counterclockwise the display surface 53 of the display panel 12 can be moved to the front side. That is, in the present embodiment, the height of the display panel 12 with respect to the support substrate 51 can be lowered by rotating the female screw 67 clockwise. Further, by rotating the female screw 67 counterclockwise, it is possible to increase the height of the display panel 12 with respect to the support substrate 51. By rotating the female screw 67 in this way, the height of the display panel 12 with respect to the support substrate 51 is adjusted.
  • the height adjustment of the display panel 12 is performed by using a dedicated jig or the like before mounting the display module 9 on the unit board 10.
  • the support substrate 51 is fixed by a jig, and the female screw 67 of each adjustment mechanism 52 is rotated.
  • 14 adjusting mechanisms 52 are configured on the peripheral edge portion 58 of the display panel 12 and the support substrate 51.
  • the height of the display panel 12 at the position where the adjustment mechanism 52 is configured can be adjusted.
  • the distance from the contact reference surface 48 of the contact convex portion 46 shown in FIG. 12 or the like to the display surface 53 is defined as the height of the display panel 12.
  • a design value is determined for the height of the display panel 12. After connecting the display panel 12 and the support board 51, the height of the display panel 12 can be adjusted to the design value over the entire area of the display surface 53 by operating the adjustment mechanisms 52 at 14 locations. Is.
  • the design value corresponds to a predetermined value.
  • eight display modules 9 are arranged for one unit board 10.
  • the height of the display panel 12 is adjusted to the design value by operating the adjustment mechanism 52 in each of the plurality of display modules 9 in advance. That is, before mounting the display module 9 on the unit board 10, the height of the display panel 12 of each display module 9 is adjusted to the same height.
  • a plurality of display modules 9 having the same height of the display panel 12 are connected to the unit board 10 with the positioning member 11 as a reference.
  • the contact reference surface 48 in the display module 9 and the contact reference surface 34 of the unit substrate 10 are in contact with each other, and the position of the display module 9 with respect to the unit substrate 10 in the Z direction is defined. Since the heights of the display panels 12 are aligned in each display module 9, the display surfaces 53 of the eight display modules 9 are arranged on the same surface. This makes it possible to display a high-quality image.
  • the heights of the display panels 12 of the display modules 9 are different and the display surfaces 53 are not arranged on the same surface.
  • a bright line or a dark line may be recognized due to a step between adjacent display surfaces 53 or the like.
  • the display surface 53 on the right side of the two display panels 12 arranged side by side is located on the front side of the display surface 53 on the left side.
  • the right end portion of the left display panel 12 is blocked by the left end portion of the right display panel 12.
  • dark lines are generated at the joints of the left and right display panels 12 and are seen.
  • the emission line is also generated due to the step between the adjacent display surfaces 53.
  • the display device 100 it is easily realized that a plurality of display surfaces 53 are arranged on the same surface by operating the adjustment mechanism 52. As a result, it is possible to sufficiently suppress the generation of bright lines and dark lines, and it is possible to display a high-quality image.
  • the adjusting mechanism 52 at a plurality of positions as in the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the flatness of the display panel 12, for example.
  • the reinforcing member 47 is adhered to the display panel 12 with, for example, an adhesive. Due to the curing and shrinkage of the adhesive, stress may be generated on the display panel 12, the display panel 12 may be distorted, and the flatness may be deteriorated. That is, when one display panel 12 is viewed from the X direction or the Y direction, the display panel 12 may have a difference in height in the Z direction and may appear wavy.
  • the number of adjusting mechanisms 52 By configuring a plurality of adjusting mechanisms 52 on each side, it is possible to sufficiently suppress such a difference in height, and it is possible to sufficiently suppress deterioration of the flatness of the display panel 12.
  • the number of adjusting mechanisms 52 is increased, and the interval at which the adjusting mechanisms 52 are arranged is reduced. As a result, the height of the display panel 12 can be adjusted with extremely high accuracy, and good flatness can be easily realized. As a result, it is possible to display a high-quality image.
  • the number of adjustment mechanisms 52 it is possible to simplify the configuration of the display module 9, reduce the number of parts, reduce the cost of parts, and the like. For example, the number of adjusting mechanisms 52 may be appropriately set based on such trade-off matters.
  • each peripheral edge of the display panel 12 may be referred to as a ridgeline of the display panel 12.
  • the display panel 12 is formed of a material having low ridge line straightness accuracy, such as a glass substrate subjected to a semiconductor process such as a thin film transistor. That is, the straightness of the side of the display panel 12 tends to change due to the application of stress. Even when the display panel 12 is formed of a material having a low ridgeline straightness accuracy, the flatness of the display panel 12 can be maintained high by arranging a plurality of adjustment mechanisms 52. This makes it possible to form a circuit for the display panel 12 by a semiconductor process, and it is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost.
  • the height of each display panel 12 is adjusted in advance by the adjustment mechanism 52, and the display unit 5 is assembled by a method in which the display module 9 is attached to the unit board 10 after the adjustment. Be done. Further, when connecting a plurality of display units 5, the heights of all the display panels 12 can be made uniform by aligning the heights of the four corners of each display unit 5. This makes it possible to assemble the display unit 5 in a short time. In addition, since the work time is shortened, it is possible to reduce the installation cost such as the labor cost related to the installation.
  • a method of aligning the heights of the display panels 12 is used.
  • this method for example, when a problem occurs in the display module 9 and a substitute display module 9 is installed, it is necessary to adjust the height of the display panel 12 each time.
  • the display device according to the present technology it is not necessary to adjust the height of the display panel 12 when the display module 9 is attached. As a result, the working time when a defect occurs can be shortened, and the time during which the display device 100 cannot operate can be shortened. Further, it is possible to reduce service costs such as labor costs related to the replacement of the display module 9.
  • the display panel 12 is sufficiently fixed to the support substrate 51 by fitting the male screw stud 66 and the female screw 67 included in the adjusting mechanism 52. This makes it possible to prevent the display panel 12 from being deformed.
  • the adjusting mechanism 52 using the male screw stud 66 and the female screw 67, it is possible to suppress the deformation of the display panel 12.
  • various deformations such as tilt and distortion of each display panel 12 and displacement of the position in the X direction or the Y direction are suppressed. As a result, the uniformity of the image quality of the image displayed by the display device 100 is improved, and high-quality image display is realized.
  • the female screw 67 and the male screw stud 66 are connected to each other via a through hole 63 for an adjusting mechanism. That is, the male screw portion 72 of the male screw stud 66 penetrates the through hole 63 for the adjustment mechanism and fits with the female screw 67.
  • the diameter of the through hole 63 for the adjusting mechanism is set to a size that does not come into contact with the female screw 67 and the male screw stud 66. Therefore, the through hole 63 is configured to have a gap between the adjusting mechanism 52 and the support substrate 51, and the adjusting mechanism 52 is penetrated without contacting the adjusting mechanism 52 and the support substrate 51. That is, the female screw 67 and the male screw stud 66 are configured apart from the support substrate 51. This prevents the through hole 63 from coming into contact with the adjusting mechanism 52 and transmitting stress to the display panel 12 when the support substrate 51 is deformed.
  • the display panel 12 is made of, for example, glass.
  • the support substrate 51 is made of, for example, aluminum. Since the coefficient of thermal expansion of aluminum is extremely higher than the coefficient of thermal expansion of glass, for example, when the temperature of the display device 100 rises, the support substrate 51 expands relatively large with respect to the display panel 12. For example, if a gap is not provided between the adjusting mechanism 52 and the support substrate 51, stress is transmitted to the display panel 12 as the support substrate 51 expands. As a result, the display panel 12 may be deformed.
  • the male screw stud 66 and the support substrate 51 do not come into contact with each other. Therefore, the support substrate 51 does not give stress to the male screw stud 66. As a result, deformation of the display panel 12 and the like is suppressed, and a high-quality image can be displayed.
  • the diameter of the through hole 63 for the adjustment mechanism is set sufficiently large so that the support substrate 51 and the male screw stud 66 do not come into contact with each other due to the expansion of the support substrate 51.
  • the diameter of the through hole 63 may be set by any method.
  • the positioning pin 45 penetrates the positioning pin through hole 79 and fits into the positioning hole 40 configured in the positioning member 11.
  • the positioning pin through hole 79 is configured to have a gap between the positioning pin 45 and the support substrate 51. This prevents the positioning pin through hole 79 from coming into contact with the positioning pin 45 when the support substrate 51 is deformed or the like. As a result, when the support substrate 51 is deformed or the like, stress is prevented from being transmitted to the display panel 12. As a result, deformation of the display panel 12 and the like is suppressed, and a high-quality image can be displayed.
  • the diameter of the positioning pin through hole 79 is set sufficiently large so that the support substrate 51 and the positioning pin 45 do not come into contact with each other due to the expansion of the support substrate 51.
  • 17 and 18 are cross-sectional views showing another configuration example of the adjusting mechanism 52.
  • the female screw 67 is fixed to the reinforcing member 47 on the display panel 12 side, and the male screw stud 66 is rotatably connected to the lid member 69.
  • the head 73 of the female screw 67 is fixed to the reinforcing member 47 connected to the display panel 12.
  • the female screw 67 is provided so that the cylindrical portion 74 having a screw hole extends to the rear side.
  • the head 71 of the male screw stud 66 is connected to the front surface of the lid member 69.
  • the male screw stud 66 is provided so that the male screw portion 72 extends to the front side.
  • a mounting hole is formed in the center of the head 71 of the male screw stud 66.
  • the rotation member 76 is arranged from the rear side of the lid member 69 and is fixed to the mounting hole of the head 71 of the male screw stud 66.
  • a torsion coil spring 68 is provided between the flat plate portion 61 of the mounting recess 60 of the support substrate 51 and the head 71 of the male screw stud 66.
  • the torsion coil spring 68 urges the male screw stud 66 toward the lid member 69.
  • the user rotates the rotating member 76 by using a driver or the like. This makes it possible to adjust the position of the female screw 67 in the Z direction.
  • the height of the display panel 12 can be adjusted.
  • the size of the through hole 63 of the flat plate portion 61 is designed so that there is a gap between the flat plate portion 61 and the female screw 67. This makes it possible to prevent stress from being transmitted to the display panel 12 due to deformation of the support substrate 51 or the like.
  • the male screw stud 66 corresponds to an embodiment of a screw rotatably attached to a support substrate.
  • the female screw 67 corresponds to an embodiment of a connecting member attached to the display panel and connected to the screw.
  • the magnet 82 is fixed to the reinforcing member 47 on the display panel 12 side.
  • a male screw stud 66 is rotatably connected to the lid member 69.
  • the head 71 of the male screw stud 66 is connected to the front surface of the lid member 69.
  • the male screw stud 66 is provided so that the male screw portion 72 extends to the front side.
  • the male screw stud 66 is connected to the rotating member 76 so as to sandwich the lid member 69.
  • the male screw stud 66 and the rotating member 76 can rotate integrally with the lid member 69.
  • the male screw stud 66 has a male screw portion 72 whose tip portion is at least made of a magnetic material.
  • the tip of the male screw portion 72 is made of a magnetic material such as cobalt or nickel.
  • the entire male screw portion 72 or the entire male screw stud 66 may be made of a magnetic material.
  • a screw hole into which the male screw portion 72 of the male screw stud 66 is fitted is formed in the flat plate portion 61 of the mounting recess 60 of the support substrate 51.
  • the tip of the male screw portion 72 can move along the Z direction. That is, the male screw portion 72 is connected to the support substrate 51 so that the tip portion can be moved by rotating.
  • a torsion coil spring 68 is provided between the flat plate portion 61 of the mounting recess 60 of the support substrate 51 and the head 71 of the male screw stud 66. The torsion coil spring 68 urges the male screw stud 66 toward the lid member 69. This makes it possible to prevent backlash between the screw hole and the male screw portion 72.
  • the user rotates the rotating member 76 by using a driver or the like.
  • This makes it possible to adjust the position of the tip of the male screw portion 72 and the magnet 82 adjusted to the tip in the Z direction.
  • the height of the display panel 12 can be adjusted.
  • the support substrate 51 is deformed due to a temperature change or the like.
  • stress may be transmitted from the screw hole of the flat plate portion 61 to the male screw portion 72.
  • the tip of the male screw portion 72 and the magnet 82 are attracted by a magnetic force. That is, the tip of the male screw portion 72 and the magnet 82 are slidably connected.
  • each adjusting mechanism 52 it is possible to slide integrally with the reinforcing member 47 and the display panel 12 to which the magnet 82 is fixed according to the deformation of the support substrate 51 or the like. This makes it possible to prevent stress from being transmitted to the display panel 12.
  • the male screw stud 66 corresponds to an embodiment of a screw whose tip portion is made of a magnetic material and whose tip portion is movably attached to a support substrate by rotation.
  • the magnet 82 corresponds to an embodiment of a connecting member attached to a display panel and connected to a screw.
  • FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the unit substrate 10 when viewed from the front side.
  • the unit substrate 10 is configured with a support convex portion 37 having a contact reference surface 34 at positions corresponding to the four corners of the display panel 12. Therefore, the contact reference surface 34 on the unit substrate 10 side is configured at positions corresponding to the four corners of the display panel 12.
  • the support board 51 is configured with a contact convex portion 46 having a contact reference surface 48 at positions corresponding to the four corners of the display panel 12 (that is, the positions of the four corners of the support board 51). Therefore, the contact reference surface 48 on the display module 9 side is configured at the four corners of the display panel 12.
  • the contact reference surface 34 on the unit board 10 side and the contact reference surface 48 on the display module 9 side come into contact with each other to define the position of each display module 9 with respect to the unit board 10 in the Z direction.
  • the entire support convex portion 37 and the contact convex portion 46 in a state where the contact reference surface 34 and the contact reference surface 48 are in contact with each other are referred to as a Z positioning mechanism 85.
  • the sum of the sizes (heights) of the support convex portion 37 and the contact convex portion 46 in the Z direction, that is, the height of the Z positioning mechanism 85 is defined as the reference height.
  • the position of each display module 9 in the Z direction with respect to the unit substrate 10 is defined by the Z positioning mechanism 85.
  • the height of the Z positioning mechanism 85 that is, the reference height is the height with respect to the unit substrate 10.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram for explaining the position of the Z positioning mechanism 85 with respect to each display module 9.
  • the heights of the support convex portion 37 and the contact convex portion 46 are precisely machined. This makes it possible to precisely process the reference height of the Z positioning mechanism 85.
  • a tolerance ⁇ may occur at the reference height of each Z positioning mechanism 85.
  • the amount of change in the support position by the Z-positioning mechanism 85 (the amount of change from the original support position of the Z-positioning mechanism 85) ⁇ h at the end of the display module 9 in the vicinity of the Z-positioning mechanism 85 is given by the following equation. expressed.
  • the distances L1 and L2 are defined with reference to the center position of the Z positioning mechanism 85 on the XY plane.
  • the Z positioning mechanism 85 at the position of the peripheral edge portion 58 of the display panel 12, it is possible to suppress the fluctuation of the position of the display surface 53 in the Z direction due to the tolerance ⁇ . That is, by forming the abutting convex portion 46 on the peripheral edge portion 57 of the support substrate 51, it is possible to suppress the fluctuation of the position of the display surface 53 in the Z direction.
  • the contact convex portions 46 are configured at the four corners of the support substrate 51. As a result, fluctuations in the position of the display surface 53 in the Z direction due to the tolerance ⁇ are sufficiently suppressed. Further, since the Z positioning mechanism 85 is configured by the positions of the four corners of the display module 9, the display module 9 can be stably supported. Each of the plurality of display modules 9 has the same configuration as each other. Therefore, the Z positioning mechanism 85 (contact convex portion 46 and support convex portion 37) is configured at the four corners of each display module 9. Therefore, the support convex portion 37 is provided close to each other with respect to the support convex portion 37 for the adjacent display module 9.
  • the Z positioning mechanism 85 (contact convex portion 46 and support convex portion 37) configured at the position of the lower left corner of the display panel 12 at the right end of the upper row is the lower right corner of the display panel 12 second from the right in the upper row. It is close to the Z positioning mechanism 85 (contact convex portion 46 and support convex portion 37) configured at the position of.
  • the Z positioning mechanism 85 (contact convex portion 46 and support convex portion 37) configured at the position of the upper left corner of the display panel 12 at the lower right end. Further, it is close to the Z positioning mechanism 85 (contact convex portion 46 and support convex portion 37) configured at the position of the upper right corner of the display panel 12 second from the right in the lower row. In this way, the Z positioning mechanism 85 (contact convex portion 46 and support convex portion 37) is installed close to the display modules 9 adjacent to each other. This makes it possible to sufficiently suppress fluctuations in the position of the display surface 53 in the Z direction due to the tolerance ⁇ .
  • the Z positioning mechanism 85 (contact convex portion 46 and support convex portion 37) may be configured at positions other than the four corners of the peripheral edge portion 58 of the display panel 12.
  • the abutting convex portion 46 corresponds to one embodiment of one or more abutting portions configured on the peripheral edge portion of the support substrate and abutting against the support member according to the present technology.
  • the contact reference surface 48 corresponds to one embodiment of the contact surface that comes into contact with the support member according to the present technology.
  • the display device 100 has nine display units 5.
  • the display units 5 are arranged so as to be arranged in a two-dimensional grid pattern, three in the X direction (horizontal direction) and three in the Y direction (vertical direction). By connecting each display unit 5, the display device 100 is configured.
  • FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of a connection method for connecting a plurality of display units 5 to each other.
  • a first connection step a plurality of unit boards 10 included in the plurality of display units 5 are connected to each other (step 101).
  • each unit board 10 of the nine display units 5 is connected. That is, the nine unit substrates 10 are connected to each other so as to be arranged in a two-dimensional grid pattern.
  • a plurality of positioning members 11 included in the plurality of display units 5 are connected to each other (step 102).
  • each positioning member 11 of the nine display units 5 is connected. That is, the nine positioning members 11 are connected to each other so as to be arranged in a two-dimensional grid pattern.
  • a third connection step a plurality of unit boards 10 connected to each other and a plurality of positioning members 11 connected to each other are connected (step 103). That is, the nine connected positioning members 11 are collectively attached to the nine connected unit boards 10.
  • the display module 9 is attached (step 104). That is, the display module 9 is attached to the nine positioning members 11 and the nine unit boards 10 that are connected. In this embodiment, eight display modules 9 are attached to one unit board 10. Therefore, 72 display modules 9 are attached to the nine unit boards 10.
  • FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the unit substrate 10 when viewed from the upper right on the front side.
  • FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the unit substrate 10 when viewed from the upper right on the front side, and is a view showing the unit substrate connecting plate 88 in an exploded perspective view.
  • FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the unit substrate 10 when viewed from the upper left side on the rear side, and is a view showing the unit substrate connecting plate 88 in an exploded perspective view.
  • FIG. 25A is an enlarged perspective view showing a portion to which the unit board connecting plate 88 is attached when the unit board 10 is viewed from the front side.
  • 25B is a cross-sectional view when the unit substrate 10 to which the unit substrate connecting plate 88 is attached is cut along a plane (XZ plane) perpendicular to the Y direction so as to pass through the center of the unit substrate connecting plate 88.
  • the unit substrate 10 shown in FIGS. 22 to 25 has a different configuration from the unit substrate 10 shown in FIGS. 19 and the like. 22 to 25 are views of the unit substrate 10 in a state where the positioning member 11 is not connected.
  • the unit substrate connecting plate 88 is used to connect the unit substrate 10.
  • the unit board connecting plate 88 has two screws 89 and a connecting portion 90.
  • FIG. 25B shows a cross-sectional view of the unit substrate connecting plate 88 in a state where the unit substrate connecting plate 88 is attached.
  • the screw 89 has a head 91 and a screw portion 92.
  • the head 91 has a disk shape.
  • the head 91 has a circular front surface and a circular rear surface.
  • the screw portion 92 is connected to the center of the rear surface of the head 91 so as to extend to the rear side.
  • a screw thread is formed in the screw portion 92.
  • the screw 89 is made of a metal material such as iron. Of course, the material of the screw 89 is not limited, and any material may be used.
  • the connecting portion 90 has a flat plate shape having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the Z direction, and has a front surface and a rear surface. As shown in FIG. 25A, two insertion holes 93 are configured on the front surface of the connecting portion 90.
  • the insertion hole 93 is a hole for inserting the screw 89.
  • the insertion hole 93 is configured as a recess having a circular bottom surface. That is, the insertion hole 93 has a circular surface as the bottom surface of the recess when the connecting portion is viewed from the front side. Further, at the center of the bottom surface of the recess, there is a through hole 94 having a circular shape when viewed from the front side. The through hole 94 penetrates the connecting portion 90.
  • the diameter of the bottom surface of the recess of the connecting portion 90 is configured to be larger than the diameter of the head 91 of the screw 89.
  • the diameter of the through hole 94 formed in the bottom surface of the recess is set to be larger than the diameter of the screw portion 92 of the screw 89 and smaller than the diameter of the head 91.
  • the height of the recess of the insertion hole 93 that is, the length of the recess in the Z direction is set to be larger than the height of the head 91 of the screw 89.
  • the height of the through hole 94 is set to be smaller than the height of the screw portion 92 of the screw.
  • the screw 89 can be inserted from the front side of the connecting portion 90 with the screw portion 92 facing the rear side.
  • the screw 89 is inserted so that the head 91 of the screw 89 fits in the recess of the connecting portion 90 and the screw portion 92 penetrates the through hole 94.
  • the connecting portion 90 is formed of a metal material such as iron.
  • the material of the connecting portion 90 is not limited, and any material may be used.
  • each surface of the unit substrate connecting plate 88 is formed as a machined surface precisely machined by machining.
  • the unit board 10 is configured with a connecting plate mounting hole 95.
  • the connecting plate mounting hole 95 is a hole for mounting the unit board connecting plate 88.
  • the connecting plate mounting hole 95 is configured on the side of the unit substrate 10.
  • two connecting plate mounting holes 95 are configured above the right side of the unit substrate 10 on the left side.
  • two connecting plate mounting holes 95 are configured above the left side of the unit substrate 10 on the right side.
  • the unit board connecting plate 88 is mounted to each of the adjacent connecting board mounting holes 95 so as to straddle the left side and the right side unit boards.
  • the connecting plate mounting holes 95 are also formed on the upper sides of the two unit boards 10.
  • the connecting plate mounting hole 95 on the upper side is configured to connect the unit board 10 to the upper side of each unit board 10. In this way, the unit board 10 is provided with connecting plate mounting holes 95 on all four sides in order to connect the unit board 10 vertically and horizontally.
  • the connecting plate mounting hole 95 is configured as a recess on the side of the unit substrate 10.
  • the surface perpendicular to the Z direction may be expressed as the bottom surface of the recess
  • the surface other than the bottom surface may be expressed as the side surface of the recess.
  • the connecting plate mounting hole 95 is formed as a machined surface in which each of the bottom surface and the side surface of the recess is precisely machined.
  • the connecting plate mounting holes 95 are adjacent to each other, and the bottom surface is rectangular on the two unit boards 10 arranged side by side.
  • a recess is formed.
  • the unit substrate connecting plate 88 is inserted into the recess formed when the unit substrates 10 are arranged side by side.
  • the unit substrate connecting plate 88 is inserted with a gap in the Y direction without a gap in the X direction.
  • a screw thread 96 is formed in the connecting plate mounting hole 95.
  • the screw thread 96 is configured to fit the screw portion 92 of the screw 89 of the unit board connecting plate 88.
  • the screw thread 96 is formed on the bottom surface of the recess of the connecting plate mounting hole 95 on the lower side of the center along the Y direction. Further, when the unit board connecting plate 88 is attached, the screw thread 96 is configured so that the positions of the through hole 94 of the connecting portion 90 and the screw thread 96 in the X direction and the Y direction are substantially equal to each other. ..
  • the screw thread 96 is formed in a shape that can be fitted with the screw portion 92.
  • FIG. 25A shows an enlarged view of the unit board connecting plate 88 as viewed from the display surface 53 side in a state where the unit board connecting plate 88 is mounted in the connecting plate mounting hole 95.
  • the connecting portion 90 of the unit board connecting plate 88 is inserted into the lower portion of the connecting plate mounting hole 95, and two screws 89 are inserted into the connecting portion 90.
  • the screw portion 92 of the screw 89 is inserted into the through hole 94 of the connecting portion 90 and penetrates the connecting portion 90.
  • the threaded portion 92 penetrating the connecting portion 90 is inserted into and fitted into the thread 96 of the extending connecting plate mounting hole 95.
  • the unit board connecting plate 88 is fixed to the two unit boards 10.
  • the unit substrate 10 can be connected in the vertical direction as well. Therefore, it is possible to connect a plurality of unit substrates 10 side by side in a two-dimensional grid pattern.
  • each surface of the unit substrate connecting plate 88 and the bottom surface and side surfaces of the recesses of the connecting plate mounting hole 95 are formed as machined surfaces precisely machined. Therefore, when the unit boards 10 are connected, the heights of the respective unit boards 10 can be made uniform with high accuracy.
  • the unit substrate connecting plate 88 corresponds to one embodiment of the first connecting member according to the present technology, which connects two supporting members adjacent to each other having two display units adjacent to each other.
  • 26A and 26B are views showing other configuration examples of the unit substrate connecting plate 88.
  • the unit board connecting plate 88 shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B the height of the unit board 10 when the unit board 10 is connected can be adjusted. This makes it possible to sufficiently suppress the difference in height of each unit substrate 10.
  • the unit substrate connecting plate 88 has a height adjusting screw 99. By rotating the height adjusting screw 99, the height of each unit board 10 can be adjusted.
  • FIG. 26A is an enlarged view of the unit board connecting plate 88 as viewed from the display surface 53 side in a state where the unit board connecting plate 88 having the height adjusting screw 99 is mounted in the connecting plate mounting hole 95.
  • FIG. 26B shows a case where the unit board 10 to which the unit board connecting plate 88 having the height adjusting screw 99 is attached is cut on a plane (XZ plane) perpendicular to the Y direction so as to pass through the center of the unit board connecting plate 88. It is a cross-sectional view of.
  • the unit board connecting plate 88 has a connecting portion 103, one screw 104, and one height adjusting screw 99.
  • the connecting portion 103 has a base portion 105 having a large thickness (size in the Z direction) and an adjusting portion 106 having a small thickness.
  • the adjusting portion 106 has a planar shape and is connected to the outer peripheral portion of the base portion 105.
  • the adjusting portion 106 is connected to the base portion 105 so as to extend in one direction (X direction in FIG. 26). Further, the adjusting portion 106 is connected to the center position of the base portion 105 in the thickness direction (Z direction).
  • the base portion 105 is configured with an insertion hole 107 formed of a recess.
  • a through hole 108 is formed on the bottom surface of the insertion hole 107.
  • a height adjusting screw through hole 109 is formed in the adjusting portion 106.
  • the through hole 108 of the base portion 105 and the height adjusting screw through hole 109 of the adjusting portion 106 are arranged so as to be arranged along one direction (X direction in FIG. 26).
  • the height adjusting screw 99 has a head portion 112, a screw portion 113, and a body portion 114.
  • the body portion 114 is formed at a position between the head portion 112 and the screw portion 113.
  • the body portion 114 has a disk-shaped flange portion 115 formed at a boundary with the screw portion 113.
  • the height adjusting screw 99 is made of a metal material such as iron. Of course, the material of the height adjusting screw 99 is not limited, and any material may be used.
  • the diameter of the portion of the body portion 114 other than the flange portion 115 is set to be substantially equal to the diameter of the screw portion 113.
  • the diameter of the height adjusting screw through hole 109 is set to be larger than the diameter of the portion of the body portion 114 other than the flange portion 115.
  • the diameters of the flange portion 115 and the head portion 112 are set so as to be substantially equal to each other and larger than the diameter of the height adjusting screw through hole 109.
  • the length of the height adjusting screw through hole 109 is set to be substantially equal to the distance from the head portion 112 to the flange portion 115.
  • the portion of the body portion 114 of the height adjusting screw 99 from the head portion 112 to the flange portion 115 is inserted into the height adjusting screw through hole 109.
  • the height adjusting screw 99 is rotatably attached to the adjusting portion 106.
  • a screw thread 96 similar to the screw thread shown in FIG. 25B or the like is formed in the connecting plate mounting hole 95 of the unit board 10.
  • the screw portion of the screw 104 mounted on the base portion 105, the screw portion 113 of the height adjusting screw 99, and the screw thread 96 are fitted to each other. ..
  • the height adjusting screw 99 By rotating the height adjusting screw 99, it is possible to change the height of the unit board 10 on the right side with respect to the unit board 10 on the left side. This makes it possible to adjust the height of each unit substrate 10. That is, by adjusting the height using the height adjusting screw 99, it is possible to make the heights of the respective unit substrates 10 uniform. Further, the height can be finely adjusted by rotating the height adjusting screw 99. As a result, the height of each unit substrate 10 is adjusted with high accuracy.
  • FIG. 27 is a view of a state in which a plurality of positioning members 11 are connected when viewed from the front side.
  • FIG. 27 shows a state in which a plurality of positioning members 11 connected to each other are connected to a plurality of unit boards 10 connected to each other. That is, the state after the third connection step is shown in the figure.
  • FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the plurality of positioning members 11 when viewed from the upper left side on the front side, and is a view showing the positioning member connecting plate 118 by an exploded perspective view.
  • FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the plurality of positioning members 11 when viewed from the upper left side on the front side, and is a view showing the positioning member connecting plate 118 by an exploded perspective view.
  • FIG. 29 is a perspective view of the plurality of positioning members 11 when viewed from the upper left side on the rear side, and is a view showing the positioning member connecting plate 118 by an exploded perspective view.
  • FIG. 30 is a cross-sectional view when a plurality of positioning members 11 to which the positioning member connecting plate 118 is attached are cut along a plane (XZ plane) perpendicular to the Y direction so as to pass through the center of the positioning member connecting plate 118. ..
  • FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram for explaining the connection of the positioning member 11 using the assembly jig.
  • FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram showing the order of connection of the positioning members 11.
  • the positioning member connecting plate 118 is used to connect the positioning member 11.
  • FIG. 27 shows three positioning members 11 connected in the X direction and the Y direction.
  • one positioning member 11 is connected to the right side of the positioning member 11 shown in the lower left, and one positioning member 11 is also connected to the upper side. Focusing on the two positioning members 11 connected in the left-right direction, the two positioning member connecting plates 118 are connected so as to straddle the right side of the positioning member 11 on the left side and the left side of the positioning member 11 on the right side. ing.
  • One of the two positioning member connecting plates 118 is connected so that the position along the Y direction is above the center of each side.
  • the other is connected so that the position along the Y direction is lower than the center of each side.
  • the left and right positioning members 11 are fixed by the two positioning member connecting plates 118, and the respective positioning members 11 are connected.
  • the positioning member 11 is connected by the two positioning member connecting plates 118.
  • FIG. 28 shows a perspective view of the vicinity of the connecting portion when the two positioning members 11 are connected in the left-right direction. Specifically, among the positioning members 11 connected to the left and right, the upper part of the right side of the positioning member 11 on the left side when viewed from the display surface side and the upper part of the left side of the positioning member 11 on the right side are centered. The perspective view of the part is shown. That is, the portion of the positioning member 11 connected to the left and right, which is shown in FIG. 27, corresponding to the periphery of the positioning member connecting plate 118 on the upper side is shown in FIG. 28. Note that FIG. 28 also shows an exploded perspective view of the positioning member connecting plate 118. FIG. 29 shows an exploded perspective view of FIG. 28 when viewed from the rear side.
  • the positioning member connecting plate 118 has two screws 119 and a connecting portion 120.
  • the connecting portion 120 is configured in a flat plate shape. When viewed from the Z direction, the connecting portion 120 has a substantially rectangular shape.
  • the connecting portion 120 includes two through holes 121 and two dowels 122.
  • the through hole 121 is a hole having a circular shape when viewed from the Z direction.
  • the two through holes 121 are both configured on the right side of the connecting portion 120 when the connecting portion 120 is viewed from the front side.
  • the diameter of the through hole 121 is set to be larger than the diameter of the screw 119. That is, the screw 119 can penetrate the through hole 121.
  • the dowel 122 is configured as a cylindrical convex portion on the rear surface of the connecting portion 120. As shown in FIG. 29, the two dowels 122 are both configured on the right side of the rear surface of the connecting portion 120 when the connecting portion 120 is viewed from the rear side. That is, when the connecting portion 120 is viewed from the front side, two dowels 122 are configured on the back side on the left side of the connecting portion 120.
  • the connecting portion 120 is formed of a metal material such as iron. Of course, the material of the connecting portion 120 is not limited, and any material may be used.
  • the two screws 119 have a head 123 and a screw portion 124.
  • the sheet metal 125 is connected to the positioning member 11.
  • the positioning member connecting plate 118 is connected to a position substantially equal to the position of the sheet metal 125 in the X direction and the Y direction.
  • the sheet metal 125 is configured in a flat plate shape. When viewed from the Z direction, the sheet metal 125 has a substantially rectangular shape. As shown in FIG. 28, for example, the sheet metal 125 is connected to the upper part on the right side of the positioning member 11 on the left side. Further, the sheet metal 125 is also connected to the upper part on the left side of the positioning member 11 on the right side.
  • the sheet metal 125 is made of a metal material such as aluminum. Of course, the material of the sheet metal 125 is not limited, and any material may be used. Further, the sheet metal 125 may be configured as the positioning member 11 by being integrally formed with the positioning member 11.
  • each of the sheet metal 125 connected to each positioning member 11 is configured with two fitting holes.
  • the sheet metal 125 connected to the positioning member 11 on the left side is configured with two dowel fitting holes 126.
  • the sheet metal 125 connected to the positioning member 11 on the right side is configured with two screw fitting holes 127.
  • the dowel fitting hole 126 is a hole for fitting with the dowel 122.
  • the sheet metal 125 connected to the positioning member 11 on the left side is configured with two upper and lower dowel fitting holes 126.
  • the diameter of the dowel fitting hole 126 is set to be substantially equal to the diameter of the dowel 122. As a result, the dowel 122 is fitted with the dowel fitting hole 126 with almost no gap in the X direction and the Y direction.
  • the screw fitting hole 127 is a hole for fitting with the screw 119 included in the positioning member connecting plate 118. Similar to the dowel fitting hole 126, the two screw fitting holes 127 are also configured one above and one below the sheet metal 125 connected to the positioning member 11 on the right side. The screw fitting hole 127 is configured with a screw thread so that it can be fitted with the screw 119 included in the positioning member connecting plate 118.
  • the positioning member 11 includes two dowel through holes 128 and two screw through holes 129.
  • the dowel through hole 128 is configured in the positioning member 11 on the left side so that the positions along the X direction and the Y direction are substantially equal to the dowel fitting hole 126 configured in the sheet metal 125.
  • the screw through hole 129 is configured in the positioning member 11 on the right side so that the positions along the X direction and the Y direction are substantially equal to the screw fitting hole 127 configured in the sheet metal 125. ..
  • the dowel through hole 128 is a hole through which the dowel 122 penetrates.
  • the screw through hole 129 is a hole through which the screw 119 penetrates.
  • the positioning member connecting plate 118 is connected to the positioning member 11 in which the sheet metal 125 is connected. Specifically, first, the dowel 122 configured in the connecting portion 120 of the positioning member connecting plate 118 is inserted into the dowel fitting hole 126 configured in the sheet metal 125 and fitted. The dowel 122 penetrates the sheet metal 125, and the tip end portion of the dowel 122 is inserted into the dowel through hole 128 of the positioning member 11. Next, the screw 119 is inserted into the through hole 121 of the connecting portion 120 of the positioning member connecting plate 118. The screw 119 penetrates the connecting portion 120, and the screw portion 124 fits into the screw fitting hole 127 formed in the sheet metal 125.
  • the screw 119 penetrates the sheet metal 125, and the tip end portion of the screw 119 is inserted into the screw through hole 129 of the positioning member 11. In this way, the positioning member connecting plate 118 is connected to the positioning member 11. By fitting the dowel 122 and the screw 119, the positioning member connecting plate 118 is stably connected to the positioning member 11.
  • An assembly jig is used when the positioning member 11 is connected by the positioning member connecting plate 118. The functions of the assembly jig will be described later.
  • step 104 the display module 9 is attached, and a large-sized display device 100 is configured.
  • the entire display module 9 and the entire positioning member 11 constituting the display device 100 are also configured to be integrally slidable with respect to the entire unit substrate 10.
  • the plurality of unit boards 10 When a plurality of unit boards 10 are connected, the plurality of unit boards 10 may be deformed due to their own weight. Even in such a case, the plurality of positioning members 11 slide and slide relative to the plurality of unit substrates 10. This makes it possible to suppress the influence of the stress generated by the deformation of the plurality of unit substrates 10 on the plurality of positioning members 11. Therefore, for example, the number of vertically connected display units 5 can be significantly increased. This makes it possible to increase the screen size of the display device 100. Further, since the influence of stress on the display panel 12 can be suppressed, it is possible to use glass having a low fracture stress as the material of the display panel 12. This improves the mass productivity of the display panel 12. Even when the plurality of unit substrates 10 are deformed due to changes in temperature and humidity, it is possible to suppress the influence of stress on the plurality of positioning members 11 in the same manner.
  • the display modules 9 are attached so that the display panels 12 have gaps in the X direction and the Y direction, but the gaps between the display panels 12 are not eliminated in any case. Since an appropriate gap is always secured between the display panels 12, the display panels 12 can be reliably removed.
  • the plurality of display modules 9 are positioned in the X direction and the Y direction with respect to the plurality of positioning members 11. That is, when installing the display module 9, it is not necessary to adjust the position of the display module 9. Therefore, the time required to install the display module 9 is shortened. In addition, the position accuracy of the display module 9 is improved.
  • the positioning member connecting plate 118 corresponds to one embodiment of the second connecting member according to the present technology, which connects two positioning members adjacent to each other having two display units adjacent to each other.
  • the positioning member connecting plate 118 may not have a dowel 122, and the positioning member connecting plate 118 may be connected to the positioning member 11 only by fitting with a screw 119.
  • the positioning member connecting plate 118 has two screws 119.
  • One screw 119 fits into the screw fitting hole 127 of the sheet metal 125 configured in the positioning member 11 on the left side.
  • the other screw 119 fits into the screw fitting hole 127 of the sheet metal 125 configured in the positioning member 11 on the right side.
  • the positioning members 11 may be directly connected to each other without using the positioning member connecting plate 118.
  • the positioning member 11 may be connected by adhesion with an adhesive.
  • the method of connecting the positioning members 11 to each other is not limited.
  • the positioning member 11 is connected by using the positioning member connecting plate 118, an assembly jig is used. A method of connecting the positioning member 11 using an assembly jig and a procedure for connecting the members 11 will be described.
  • the positioning member 11 is configured with a jig hole 133.
  • the jig hole 133 is a hole for fitting with the pin member of the assembly jig.
  • the assembly jig is used to fix the positioning member 11 when connecting the positioning member 11.
  • the specific shape of the assembly jig is not limited, and any assembly jig designed so that the positioning member 11 can be connected may be adopted.
  • the assembly jig has a pin member.
  • the positioning member 11 is configured with a jig hole 133.
  • two jig holes 133 are configured for one positioning member 11.
  • One of the two jig holes 133 is configured in the vicinity of the leftmost partition rib portion 18 on the central rib portion 17 of the positioning member 11.
  • the other is configured on the central rib portion 17 of the positioning member 11 in the vicinity of the partition rib portion 18 configured on the far right side.
  • the jig hole 133 is a hole having a circular shape when viewed from the Z direction.
  • the jig hole 133 is a hole penetrating the positioning member 11, but the jig hole 133 may be a concave portion having a circular shape when viewed from the Z direction.
  • the diameter of the jig hole 133 is set to be substantially equal to the diameter of the pin member included in the assembly jig. That is, the jig hole 133 and the pin member are fitted to each other in the X direction and the Y direction without any gap.
  • three different types of assembly jigs are used depending on the connecting direction of the positioning member 11.
  • the left-right jig 136 is used.
  • the vertical jig 137 is used.
  • the positioning member 11 is connected in the left-right direction and the positioning member 11 is already connected to the lower side of the newly connected positioning member 11, the positioning member 11 is connected in the left-right direction and the up-down direction. It is necessary to connect at the same time. In such a case, the combined jig 138 is used.
  • FIG. 32A is a schematic view showing the connection of the positioning member 11 by the left and right jig 136.
  • FIG. 32A shows a positioning member 11 arranged in the left-right direction, a jig hole 133, and a left-right jig 136.
  • the two squares shown in FIG. 32A schematically represent the positioning member 11. Further, the rectangle schematically represents the left and right jig 136.
  • the four points schematically represent the jig holes 133 configured in the respective positioning members 11.
  • the left and right jig 136 has four pin members. When the positioning members 11 are connected in the left-right direction, four pin members are fitted into the jig holes 133 configured in each of the positioning members 11. As a result, each positioning member 11 is fixed. With the positioning member 11 fixed, the positioning member connecting plate 118 is connected. As a result, the positioning members 11 are connected in the left-right direction.
  • FIG. 32B is a schematic view showing the connection of the positioning member 11 by the vertical jig 137.
  • FIG. 32B shows a schematic diagram in which the positioning member 11 is connected in the left-right direction as in FIG. 32A, and then the positioning member 11 is connected to the upper side of the positioning member 11 on the right side.
  • the rectangle shown in FIG. 32B schematically represents the vertical jig 137. Similar to the connection by the left and right jig 136, the jig hole 133 and the pin member are fitted, and the positioning member 11 is connected in the vertical direction.
  • FIG. 32C is a schematic view showing the connection of the positioning member 11 by the combined jig 138.
  • the positioning member 146 is on the left side of the upper side positioning member 144 on the right side and on the upper side of the lower side positioning member 145 on the left side.
  • a schematic diagram is shown when connecting the above.
  • the pentagon shown in FIG. 32C schematically represents the combined jig 138.
  • the pin member is fitted into the jig hole 133 on the left side of the positioning member 144 on the upper side on the right side. Further, the pin member is fitted into the jig hole 133, which is configured in each of the left upper positioning member 146 and the left lower positioning member 145. As a result, the positioning member 146 is connected.
  • the positioning member connecting plate 118 is connected in a state where the positioning member 11 is fixed at a predetermined position. This makes it possible to connect a plurality of positioning members 11 with high accuracy. For example, it is possible to suppress deviations in the X direction and the Y direction of each of the positioning members 11 connected in a two-dimensional lattice pattern. Since the deviation of each of the display modules 9 attached to the positioning member 11 in the X direction and the Y direction is also suppressed, it is possible to display a high quality image.
  • FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram showing the order of connection of the positioning members 11.
  • the positioning members 11 are connected in the order of the arrows shown in FIG.
  • Each positioning member 11 is assembled in a state of being arranged on a plane, that is, a state in which the display surface 53 is arranged so as to be perpendicular to the direction of gravity.
  • the vertical unit of the positioning members 11 connected in a two-dimensional grid pattern may be expressed as a row and the horizontal unit may be expressed as a step.
  • one positioning member 11 is arranged.
  • the positioning member 11 arranged first will be referred to as a reference positioning member 141.
  • the reference positioning member 141 is shown at the fourth position from the left side on the lowermost side.
  • the row in which the reference positioning member 141 is arranged is referred to as the first row
  • the row to the right of the first row is referred to as the second row
  • the row to the right of the second row is referred to as the third row.
  • the column number is expressed for the right side of the first column.
  • the column number is expressed in the same manner for the left side of the first column, such that the column to the left of the first column is the second column and the column to the left of the second column is the third column. ..
  • the overlapping column numbers on the right side and the left side may be expressed by clearly indicating the direction, such as the second column on the right side and the second column on the left side, if necessary. be.
  • two or more positioning members 11 are connected along the left-right direction by using the left-right jig 136. That is, one or more positioning members 11 are connected to the reference positioning member 141 in the left-right direction.
  • the number of positioning members 11 connected is determined, for example, depending on the size of the display device 100.
  • the display device 100 is configured by the nine display units 5 as in the display device 100 shown in FIG. 2, three positioning members 11 are configured in the left-right direction. That is, two positioning members 11 are connected to the reference positioning member 141.
  • a large number of positioning members 11 are connected in the left-right direction.
  • the number of positioning members 11 connected in the left-right direction is not limited.
  • two or more positioning members 11 are connected along the vertical direction.
  • one or more positioning members 11 are connected upward to the reference positioning member 141.
  • the number of positioning members 11 connected in the vertical direction is not limited.
  • the positioning member 11 is connected using the combined jig 138.
  • the positioning member 11 is first connected to the second stage of the second row on the right side. Specifically, one positioning member 11 is simultaneously connected to the upper side of the first-stage positioning member 11 in the second row on the right side and the right side of the second-stage positioning member 11 in the first row. Will be done.
  • the positioning member 11 is connected to the second stage of the third row on the right side.
  • the positioning member 11 is connected to the third stage of the second row on the right side. In this way, the positioning member 11 is repeatedly connected to the two positioning members 11 that are already connected so that one positioning member 11 is simultaneously connected.
  • the positioning member 11 may be connected to the third stage of the second row on the right side.
  • the order in which the positioning member 11 is connected by using the combined jig 138 is not limited, and the step of connecting the positioning member 11 in the upper side and the left-right direction of the two already connected positioning members 11 is repeated arbitrarily.
  • the connection method in the order of may be adopted.
  • the left-right direction corresponds to one embodiment of the first direction according to the present technology.
  • the vertical direction corresponds to one embodiment of the second direction orthogonal to the first direction according to the present technology.
  • the left and right jig 136 corresponds to an embodiment of the first jig for fixing two positioning members so as to be arranged adjacent to each other along the first direction according to the present technology.
  • the vertical jig 137 corresponds to an embodiment of a second jig for fixing two positioning members so as to be arranged adjacent to each other along a second direction according to the present technology.
  • the combined jig 138 fixes the second positioning member so as to be adjacent to the first positioning member along the first direction, and the second direction with respect to the first positioning member.
  • the positioning member 146 corresponds to the first positioning member
  • the positioning member 144 corresponds to the second positioning member
  • the positioning member 145 corresponds to the third positioning member.
  • the display device 100 has one or more display modules 9.
  • the display module 9 has an adjustment mechanism 52, and the relative distance of the display panel 12 to the support board 51 can be adjusted. This makes it possible to display a high-quality image.
  • the positioning member 11 that defines the position of each of the one or more display modules 9 with respect to the unit board 10 is slidably connected to the unit board 10. This makes it possible to display a high-quality image.
  • expressions using "more” such as “greater than A” and “less than A” include both the concept including the case equivalent to A and the concept not including the case equivalent to A. It is an expression that includes the concept. For example, “greater than A” is not limited to the case where the equivalent of A is not included, and “greater than or equal to A” is also included. Further, “less than A” is not limited to “less than A” and includes “less than or equal to A”. When implementing this technique, specific settings and the like may be appropriately adopted from the concepts included in “greater than A” and “less than A” so that the effects described above can be exhibited.
  • this technology can also adopt the following configurations.
  • One or more display modules including a display panel capable of displaying images, A support member that supports the one or more display modules, and A display device slidably connected to the support member and comprising a positioning member that defines the position of each of the one or more display modules with respect to the support member.
  • the display device according to (1) The support member is a display device that slidably supports one or more display modules.
  • the display panel has a display surface for displaying the image.
  • the positioning member is a display device that defines the position of each of the one or more display modules in a direction parallel to the display surface.
  • the positioning member has one or more marks configured at predetermined positions.
  • the one or more display modules are display devices arranged with respect to the support member with reference to the one or more marks.
  • the positioning member has one or more positioning holes as the one or more marks.
  • a display device in which each of the one or more display modules has a pin member and is arranged with respect to the support substrate so that the pin member fits into the positioning hole.
  • the positioning member has one or more pin members as the one or more marks.
  • a display device in which each of the one or more display modules has a positioning hole and is arranged with respect to the positioning member so that the positioning hole fits with the pin member.
  • the positioning member has a through hole and has a through hole.
  • the support member has a mounting hole configured at a position corresponding to the through hole.
  • the display device further comprises a fitting member that penetrates the through hole and is fitted into the mounting hole to slidably connect the positioning member to the support member.
  • the positioning member is a display device in which a slidable range with respect to the support member is defined.
  • a display device in which the slidable range is defined by the diameter of the through hole of the positioning member.
  • (11) The display device according to any one of (1) to (10).
  • the display panel has a display surface for displaying the image.
  • the support member supports the back surface of the display module on the side opposite to the display surface.
  • the positioning member is a display device arranged between the back surface portion and the support member.
  • Each of the one or more display modules has a magnetic material member which constitutes a part of the back surface portion and is made of a magnetic material.
  • the support substrate has a magnet arranged at a position corresponding to the position of the magnetic member.
  • the one or more display modules are display devices supported by the support member by a magnetic force acting between the magnet and the magnetic member.
  • the one or more display modules are fixed to the positioning member and fixed to the positioning member.
  • the one or more display modules are display devices which are a plurality of display modules.
  • One display unit is composed of the one or more display modules, the positioning member, and the support member.
  • the display device is a display device including a plurality of display units.
  • the display device according to (16), further A display device including a second connecting member that connects two positioning members adjacent to each other of the two display units adjacent to each other. (18) It is a connection method that connects multiple display units to each other.
  • Each of the plurality of display units One or more display modules, including a display panel capable of displaying images, A support member that supports the one or more display modules, and It has a positioning member that is slidably connected to the support member and defines the position of each of the one or more display modules with respect to the support member.
  • the second connection step is a connection method in which the plurality of positioning members are connected in a grid pattern along each of a first direction and a second direction orthogonal to the first direction.
  • the second connection step is A step of connecting two or more positioning members along the first direction by using a first jig for fixing the two positioning members so as to be adjacent to each other along the first direction.
  • the second positioning member is fixed so as to be adjacent to the first positioning member along the first direction, and the second positioning member is fixed to the first positioning member along the second direction.
  • a third jig that fixes the third positioning member so as to be adjacent to each other, the first positioning member and the two positioning members that are related to the third positioning member are used.
  • a connection method including a step of connecting a positioning member to be a positioning member of the above.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Multimedia (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • Devices For Indicating Variable Information By Combining Individual Elements (AREA)

Abstract

A display device according to one aspect of the present technology is provided with one or more display modules, a supporting member, and a positioning member. The one or more display modules include a display panel which can display an image. The supporting member supports the one or more display modules. The positioning member is slidably connected to the supporting member. Further, the positioning member defines the position of each of the one or more display modules with respect to the supporting member. Thereby a high quality image can be displayed.

Description

表示装置、及び接続方法Display device and connection method
 本技術は、画像を表示する表示装置、及び接続方法に関する。 This technology relates to a display device that displays images and a connection method.
 特許文献1には、表示パネルが取付けられる基板の位置を調整する治具を備える表示装置について開示されている。具体的には、基板の長辺及び短辺のそれぞれに治具が設けられる。治具に偏芯ドライバが挿入され、偏芯ドライバが回転されることで基板の位置が調整される。これにより、所定の基準位置に基板を固定することが可能となる(特許文献1の明細書段落[0007][0022][0029]~[0038]図4等)。 Patent Document 1 discloses a display device including a jig for adjusting the position of a substrate on which a display panel is mounted. Specifically, jigs are provided on each of the long side and the short side of the substrate. The eccentric driver is inserted into the jig, and the position of the board is adjusted by rotating the eccentric driver. This makes it possible to fix the substrate at a predetermined reference position (paragraphs [0007] [0022] [0029] to [0038] FIG. 4 of Patent Document 1).
特開2015-194516号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-194516
 画像を表示可能な表示装置において、高品質な画像を表示することが可能な技術が求められている。 In a display device capable of displaying an image, a technology capable of displaying a high-quality image is required.
 以上のような事情に鑑み、本技術の目的は、高品質な画像を表示することが可能な表示装置、及び接続方法を提供することにある。 In view of the above circumstances, an object of the present technology is to provide a display device capable of displaying a high-quality image and a connection method.
 上記目的を達成するため、本技術の一形態に係る表示装置は、1以上の表示モジュールと、支持部材と、位置決め部材とを具備する。
 前記1以上の表示モジュールは、画像を表示可能な表示パネルを含む。
 前記支持部材は、前記1以上の表示モジュールを支持する。
 前記位置決め部材は、前記支持部材に摺動可能に接続され、前記支持部材に対する前記1以上の表示モジュールの各々の位置を規定する。
In order to achieve the above object, the display device according to one embodiment of the present technology includes one or more display modules, a support member, and a positioning member.
The one or more display modules include a display panel capable of displaying an image.
The support member supports the one or more display modules.
The positioning member is slidably connected to the support member and defines the position of each of the one or more display modules with respect to the support member.
 この表示装置では、支持部材に対する1以上の表示モジュールの各々の位置を規定する位置決め部材が、支持部材に摺動可能に接続される。これにより、高品質な画像を表示することが可能となる。 In this display device, a positioning member that defines the position of each of one or more display modules with respect to the support member is slidably connected to the support member. This makes it possible to display a high-quality image.
 前記支持部材は、前記1以上の表示モジュールを摺動可能に支持してもよい。 The support member may slidably support one or more display modules.
 前記表示パネルは、前記画像を表示する表示面を有してもよい。この場合、前記位置決め部材は、前記表示面に平行な方向における前記1以上の表示モジュールの各々の位置を規定してもよい。 The display panel may have a display surface for displaying the image. In this case, the positioning member may define the position of each of the one or more display modules in a direction parallel to the display surface.
 前記位置決め部材は、所定の位置に構成された1以上の目印を有してもよい。この場合、前記1以上の表示モジュールは、前記1以上の目印を基準として、前記支持部材に対して配置されてもよい。 The positioning member may have one or more marks configured at predetermined positions. In this case, the one or more display modules may be arranged with respect to the support member with reference to the one or more marks.
 前記位置決め部材は、前記1以上の目印として、1以上の位置決め穴を有してもよい。この場合、前記1以上の表示モジュールの各々は、ピン部材を有し、前記ピン部材が前記位置決め穴と嵌合するように、前記支持基板に対して配置されてもよい。 The positioning member may have one or more positioning holes as the one or more marks. In this case, each of the one or more display modules may have a pin member and may be arranged with respect to the support substrate so that the pin member fits into the positioning hole.
 前記位置決め部材は、前記1以上の目印として、1以上のピン部材を有してもよい。この場合、前記1以上の表示モジュールの各々は、位置決め穴を有し、前記位置決め穴が前記ピン部材と嵌合するように、前記位置決め部材に対して配置されてもよい。 The positioning member may have one or more pin members as the one or more marks. In this case, each of the one or more display modules may have a positioning hole and may be arranged with respect to the positioning member so that the positioning hole fits with the pin member.
 前記位置決め部材は、貫通穴を有してもよい。この場合、前記支持部材は、前記貫通穴に対応する位置に構成された取付穴を有してもよい。また、前記表示装置は、さらに、前記貫通穴を貫通して前記取付穴に嵌合され、前記位置決め部材を前記支持部材に対して摺動可能に接続する嵌合部材を具備してもよい。 The positioning member may have a through hole. In this case, the support member may have a mounting hole configured at a position corresponding to the through hole. Further, the display device may further include a fitting member that penetrates the through hole and is fitted into the mounting hole to slidably connect the positioning member to the support member.
 前記嵌合部材は、前記貫通穴よりも大きいサイズを有する頭部と、前記取付穴に嵌合されるネジ部とを有する段付きネジであってもよい。 The fitting member may be a stepped screw having a head having a size larger than the through hole and a screw portion fitted into the mounting hole.
 前記位置決め部材は、前記支持部材に対する摺動可能範囲が規定されてもよい。 The positioning member may have a slidable range with respect to the support member.
 前記位置決め部材の前記貫通穴の径により、前記摺動可能範囲が規定されてもよい。 The slidable range may be defined by the diameter of the through hole of the positioning member.
 前記表示パネルは、前記画像を表示する表示面を有してもよい。この場合、前記支持部材は、前記表示モジュールの前記表示面とは反対側の背面部を支持してもよい。また、前記位置決め部材は、前記背面部と前記支持部材との間に配置されてもよい。 The display panel may have a display surface for displaying the image. In this case, the support member may support the back surface portion of the display module on the side opposite to the display surface. Further, the positioning member may be arranged between the back surface portion and the support member.
 前記1以上の表示モジュールの各々は、前記背面部の一部を構成し磁性体からなる磁性体部材を有してもよい。この場合、前記支持基板は、前記磁性体部材の位置に対応する位置に配置される磁石を有してもよい。また、前記1以上の表示モジュールは、前記磁石と前記磁性体部材との間に作用する磁力により、前記支持部材に支持されてもよい。 Each of the one or more display modules may have a magnetic material member which constitutes a part of the back surface portion and is made of a magnetic material. In this case, the support substrate may have a magnet arranged at a position corresponding to the position of the magnetic member. Further, the one or more display modules may be supported by the support member by the magnetic force acting between the magnet and the magnetic member.
 前記1以上の表示モジュールは、前記位置決め部材に対して固定されてもよい。この場合、前記1以上の表示モジュール及び前記位置決め部材は、前記支持基板に対して、一体的に摺動可能に構成されてもよい。 The one or more display modules may be fixed to the positioning member. In this case, the one or more display modules and the positioning member may be configured to be integrally slidable with respect to the support substrate.
 前記1以上の表示モジュールは、複数の表示モジュールであってもよい。 The one or more display modules may be a plurality of display modules.
 前記1以上の表示モジュール、前記位置決め部材、及び前記支持部材により、1つの表示ユニットが構成されてもよい。この場合、前記表示装置は、さらに、複数の表示ユニットを具備してもよい。 One display unit may be configured by the one or more display modules, the positioning member, and the support member. In this case, the display device may further include a plurality of display units.
 前記表示装置は、さらに、前記互いに隣接する2つの表示ユニットが有する互いに隣接する2つの支持部材を連結する第1の連結部材を具備してもよい。 The display device may further include a first connecting member that connects two adjacent support members of the two adjacent display units.
 前記表示装置は、さらに、前記互いに隣接する2つの表示ユニットが有する互いに隣接する2つの位置決め部材を連結する第2の連結部材を具備してもよい。 The display device may further include a second connecting member that connects two adjacent positioning members of the two adjacent display units.
 本技術の一形態に係る接続方法は、複数の表示ユニットを互いに接続する接続方法であって、第1の接続ステップと、第2の接続ステップと、第3の接続ステップとを含む。
 前記第1の接続ステップは、前記複数の表示ユニットが有する複数の支持部材を互いに接続する。
 前記第2の接続ステップは、前記複数の表示ユニットが有する複数の位置決め部材を互いに接続する。
 前記第3の接続ステップは、互いに接続された前記複数の支持部材と、互いに接続された前記複数の位置決め部材とを接続する。
 また、前記複数の表示ユニットの各々は、画像を表示可能な表示パネルを含む1以上の表示モジュールと、前記1以上の表示モジュールを支持する支持部材と、前記支持部材に摺動可能に接続され、前記支持部材に対する前記1以上の表示モジュールの各々の位置を規定する位置決め部材とを有する。
The connection method according to one embodiment of the present technology is a connection method for connecting a plurality of display units to each other, and includes a first connection step, a second connection step, and a third connection step.
The first connection step connects a plurality of support members included in the plurality of display units to each other.
The second connection step connects a plurality of positioning members included in the plurality of display units to each other.
The third connection step connects the plurality of support members connected to each other and the plurality of positioning members connected to each other.
Further, each of the plurality of display units is slidably connected to one or more display modules including a display panel capable of displaying an image, a support member for supporting the one or more display modules, and the support member. It has a positioning member that defines the position of each of the one or more display modules with respect to the support member.
 前記第2の接続ステップは、前記複数の位置決め部材を、第1の方向、及び前記第1の方向に直交する第2の方向の各々に沿って、格子状に接続してもよい。 In the second connection step, the plurality of positioning members may be connected in a grid pattern along each of a first direction and a second direction orthogonal to the first direction.
 前記第2の接続ステップは、
 前記第1の方向に沿って互いに隣接して並ぶように2つの位置決め部材を固定する第1の治具を用いて、前記第1の方向に沿って2以上の位置決め部材を接続するステップと、
 前記第2の方向に沿って互いに隣接して並ぶように2つの位置決め部材を固定する第2の治具を用いて、前記第2の方向に沿って2以上の位置決め部材を接続するステップと、
 第1の位置決め部材に対して前記第1の方向に沿って隣接して並ぶように第2の位置決め部材を固定し、かつ、前記第1の位置決め部材に対して前記第2の方向に沿って隣接して並ぶように第3の位置決め部材を固定する第3の治具を用いて、前記第2の位置決め部材及び前記第3の位置決め部材の関係となる2つの位置決め部材に対して前記第1の位置決め部材となる位置決め部材を接続するステップと
 を含んでもよい。
The second connection step is
A step of connecting two or more positioning members along the first direction by using a first jig for fixing the two positioning members so as to be adjacent to each other along the first direction.
A step of connecting two or more positioning members along the second direction by using a second jig for fixing the two positioning members so as to be adjacent to each other along the second direction.
The second positioning member is fixed so as to be adjacent to the first positioning member along the first direction, and the second positioning member is fixed to the first positioning member along the second direction. Using a third jig that fixes the third positioning member so as to be adjacent to each other, the first positioning member and the two positioning members that are related to the third positioning member are used. It may include a step of connecting a positioning member to be a positioning member of the above.
本技術の一実施形態に係る表示装置の構成例を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the display device which concerns on one Embodiment of this technique. 表示部の構成例を示す模式図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows the structural example of a display part. 表示ユニットの概要を示す模式図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows the outline of the display unit. 表示ユニットを、前方側の右上方から見た場合の分解斜視図である。It is an exploded perspective view when the display unit is seen from the upper right on the front side. 表示ユニットを、前方側の右上方から見た場合の斜視図であり、複数の表示モジュールを取り外した場合の図である。It is a perspective view when the display unit is seen from the upper right on the front side, and is the figure when a plurality of display modules are removed. 表示ユニットを、後方側の左上方から見た場合の分解斜視図である。It is an exploded perspective view when the display unit is seen from the upper left side of the rear side. 表示ユニットを前方側から見た場合の、表示ユニットの右上方の部分を拡大して示す、分解斜視図である。It is an exploded perspective view which shows the part on the upper right of the display unit enlarged when the display unit is seen from the front side. 図7に示す拡大部分を、後方側から見た場合の分解斜視図である。FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of the enlarged portion shown in FIG. 7 when viewed from the rear side. 図7に示す拡大部分の段付きネジの中心を通るように、Y方向に垂直な面(XZ平面)で切断した場合の断面図の一部である。It is a part of a cross-sectional view when cut in a plane (XZ plane) perpendicular to the Y direction so as to pass through the center of the stepped screw of the enlarged portion shown in FIG. 7. 表示ユニットを前方側から見た場合の、表示ユニットの上辺部分を、Y方向に垂直な面(XZ平面)で切断した場合の断面図の一部である。It is a part of a cross-sectional view when the upper side portion of the display unit is cut by a plane (XZ plane) perpendicular to the Y direction when the display unit is viewed from the front side. 図10に示す断面を、後方側から見た場合の斜視図である。It is a perspective view when the cross section shown in FIG. 10 is seen from the rear side. 表示モジュールの背面部の構成例を示す斜視図である。It is a perspective view which shows the structural example of the back part of the display module. 表示モジュールをY方向から見た場合の構成例を示す模式図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows the structural example when the display module is seen from the Y direction. 表示モジュールを前方側から見た場合の分解斜視図である。It is an exploded perspective view when the display module is seen from the front side. 表示モジュールの上辺を、調整機構の中心を通るようにY方向に垂直な面(XZ平面)で切断した場合の断面図の一部である。It is a part of a cross-sectional view when the upper side of the display module is cut along a plane (XZ plane) perpendicular to the Y direction so as to pass through the center of the adjustment mechanism. 表示モジュールを後方側から見た場合の分解斜視図である。It is an exploded perspective view when the display module is seen from the rear side. 調整機構の他の構成例を示す断面図である。It is sectional drawing which shows the other structural example of the adjustment mechanism. 調整機構の他の構成例を示す断面図である。It is sectional drawing which shows the other structural example of the adjustment mechanism. ユニット基板を前方側から見た場合の斜視図である。It is a perspective view when the unit board is seen from the front side. 各表示モジュールに対する、Z位置決め機構の位置について説明するための模式図である。It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the position of the Z positioning mechanism with respect to each display module. 複数の表示ユニットを互いに接続する接続方法の一例を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows an example of the connection method which connects a plurality of display units to each other. ユニット基板を、前方側の右上方から見た場合の斜視図である。It is a perspective view when the unit board is seen from the upper right on the front side. ユニット基板を、前方側の右上方から見た場合の斜視図であり、ユニット基板連結板を分解斜視図により図示した図である。It is a perspective view when the unit board is seen from the upper right on the front side, and is the figure which showed the unit board connecting plate by an exploded perspective view. ユニット基板を、後方側の左上方から見た場合の斜視図であり、ユニット基板連結板を分解斜視図により図示した図である。It is a perspective view when the unit board is seen from the upper left side of the rear side, and is the figure which illustrated the unit board connecting plate by an exploded perspective view. ユニット基板を前方側から見た場合の、ユニット基板連結板が取付けられる部分を拡大して示す、斜視図及び断面図である。It is a perspective view and the cross-sectional view which shows the part where the unit board connecting plate is attached enlarged when the unit board is seen from the front side. ユニット基板連結板の他の構成例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the other structural example of a unit board connecting plate. 複数の位置決め部材が接続された状態を、前方側から見た場合の図である。It is a figure when the state which a plurality of positioning members are connected is seen from the front side. 複数の位置決め部材を、前方側の左上方から見た場合の斜視図であり、位置決め部材連結板を分解斜視図により図示した図である。It is a perspective view when a plurality of positioning members are seen from the upper left side of the front side, and is the figure which illustrated the positioning member connecting plate by an exploded perspective view. 複数の位置決め部材を、後方側の左上方から見た場合の斜視図であり、位置決め部材連結板を分解斜視図により図示した図である。It is a perspective view when a plurality of positioning members are viewed from the upper left side on the rear side, and is the figure which showed the positioning member connecting plate by an exploded perspective view. 位置決め部材連結板が取付けられた複数の位置決め部材を、位置決め部材連結板の中心を通るようにY方向に垂直な面(XZ平面)で切断した場合の断面図である。It is sectional drawing in the case where a plurality of positioning members to which a positioning member connecting plate is attached are cut by a plane (XZ plane) perpendicular to the Y direction so as to pass through the center of the positioning member connecting plate. 組立治具を用いた位置決め部材の接続を説明するための模式図である。It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the connection of the positioning member using an assembly jig. 位置決め部材の接続の順番を示す模式図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows the order of connection of a positioning member.
 以下、本技術に係る実施形態を、図面を参照しながら説明する。 Hereinafter, embodiments relating to this technology will be described with reference to the drawings.
 [表示装置の構成例]
 図1は、本技術の一実施形態に係る表示装置100の構成例を示すブロック図である。
 表示装置100は、画像を表示可能な装置であり、制御部1、及び表示部2を備える。
 なお、本開示において、画像は、静止画像、及び動画像(映像)の両方を含む。
[Display device configuration example]
FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a display device 100 according to an embodiment of the present technology.
The display device 100 is a device capable of displaying an image, and includes a control unit 1 and a display unit 2.
In the present disclosure, the image includes both a still image and a moving image (video).
 制御部1は、例えばCPU、GPU、DSP等のプロセッサ、ROMやRAM等のメモリ、HDD等の記憶デバイス等、コンピュータの構成に必要なハードウェアを有する。例えばCPU等がROM等に予め記録されている本技術に係るプログラムをRAMにロードして実行することにより、表示装置100による画像の表示が実行される。
 制御部1の構成は限定されず、任意のハードウェア及びソフトウェアが用いられてよい。もちろんFPGA、ASIC等のハードウェアが用いられてもよい。また制御部1が構成される位置も限定されず、任意に設計されてよい。
 プログラムは、例えば種々の記録媒体を介して表示装置100にインストールされる。あるいは、インターネット等を介してプログラムのインストールが実行されてもよい。プログラムが記録される記録媒体の種類等は限定されず、コンピュータが読み取り可能な任意の記録媒体が用いられてよい。例えば、コンピュータが読み取り可能な非一過性の任意の記憶媒体が用いられてよい。
The control unit 1 has hardware necessary for configuring a computer, such as a processor such as a CPU, GPU, and DSP, a memory such as ROM and RAM, and a storage device such as an HDD. For example, when a CPU or the like loads and executes a program according to the present technology recorded in advance in a ROM or the like into a RAM, an image is displayed by the display device 100.
The configuration of the control unit 1 is not limited, and any hardware and software may be used. Of course, hardware such as FPGA and ASIC may be used. Further, the position where the control unit 1 is configured is not limited, and may be arbitrarily designed.
The program is installed in the display device 100, for example, via various recording media. Alternatively, the program may be installed via the Internet or the like. The type of recording medium on which the program is recorded is not limited, and any computer-readable recording medium may be used. For example, any non-transient storage medium readable by a computer may be used.
 例えば、制御部1により、表示部2による画像の表示動作が制御される。
 例えば制御部1により、タイミング信号や画素信号等の制御信号が生成され、表示部2に信号線を介して供給される。タイミング信号は、例えば、水平同期信号や垂直同期信号を含む。また、画素信号は、例えば、R(Red)、G(Green)およびB(Blue)のそれぞれの階調を示す信号を含む。
 その他、制御部1により、表示装置100による種々の動作が制御される。
For example, the control unit 1 controls the image display operation by the display unit 2.
For example, the control unit 1 generates a control signal such as a timing signal or a pixel signal, and supplies the control signal to the display unit 2 via a signal line. The timing signal includes, for example, a horizontal synchronization signal and a vertical synchronization signal. Further, the pixel signal includes, for example, a signal indicating each gradation of R (Red), G (Green), and B (Blue).
In addition, the control unit 1 controls various operations by the display device 100.
 [表示部]
 図2は、表示部2の構成例を示す模式図である。
 本実施形態では、表示部2は、複数の表示ユニット5を有する。
 複数の表示ユニット5の各々は、画像を表示可能な画像表示面6を有する。図2に示すように、複数の表示ユニット5は、画像表示面6が2次元格子状に並ぶように設置される。これにより、大画面による画像の表示を実現することが可能となる。
 制御部1は、複数の表示ユニット5の画像表示面6により、例えば1枚の画像等、所望の画像が表示されるように、各表示ユニット5の動作を制御する。
[Display]
FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing a configuration example of the display unit 2.
In the present embodiment, the display unit 2 has a plurality of display units 5.
Each of the plurality of display units 5 has an image display surface 6 capable of displaying an image. As shown in FIG. 2, the plurality of display units 5 are installed so that the image display surfaces 6 are arranged in a two-dimensional grid pattern. This makes it possible to display an image on a large screen.
The control unit 1 controls the operation of each display unit 5 so that a desired image such as one image is displayed by the image display surfaces 6 of the plurality of display units 5.
 以下、図2に例示するように複数の画像表示面6を正面から見て、左右方向をX方向とし、上下方向をY方向として説明を行う。また奥行方向(画像表示面6に垂直な方向)をZ方向として説明を行う。
 またX方向の矢印の向きを右側、その反対側を左側と記載する。またY方向の矢印の向きを上方側、その反対側を下方側と記載する。またZ方向の矢印の向きを後方側、その反対側を前方側と記載する。
 もちろん、本技術の適用において、表示装置100が使用される向き等が限定される訳ではない。
Hereinafter, as illustrated in FIG. 2, when the plurality of image display surfaces 6 are viewed from the front, the left-right direction is the X direction and the vertical direction is the Y direction. Further, the description will be given with the depth direction (direction perpendicular to the image display surface 6) as the Z direction.
Further, the direction of the arrow in the X direction is described as the right side, and the opposite side is described as the left side. Further, the direction of the arrow in the Y direction is described as the upper side, and the opposite side is described as the lower side. Further, the direction of the arrow in the Z direction is described as the rear side, and the opposite side is described as the front side.
Of course, in the application of this technique, the direction in which the display device 100 is used is not limited.
 図2に示す例では、X方向(左右方向)に3つ、Y方向(上下方向)に3つの合計9つの表示ユニットが配置される。複数の表示ユニット5の数は限定されない。
 また、表示ユニット5が1つの場合でも、本技術は適用可能である。すなわち、本技術は、1以上の表示ユニット5が配置される場合に適用可能である。
In the example shown in FIG. 2, a total of nine display units are arranged, three in the X direction (horizontal direction) and three in the Y direction (vertical direction). The number of the plurality of display units 5 is not limited.
Further, even when there is only one display unit 5, this technique can be applied. That is, this technique is applicable when one or more display units 5 are arranged.
 [表示ユニット]
 図3は、表示ユニット5の概要を示す模式図である。
 図3には、表示ユニット5をY方向から見た場合の構成例が模式的に図示されている。
 表示ユニット5は、複数の表示モジュール9と、ユニット基板10と、位置決め部材11とを有する。図3に示す例では、左右方向、すなわちX方向に3つの表示モジュールが配置される。もちろん表示ユニット5が有する表示モジュール9の個数は限定されない。
 例えば、表示モジュール9が1つの場合でも、本技術は適用可能である。すなわち、本技術は、1以上の表示モジュール9が配置される場合に適用可能である。
[Display unit]
FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing an outline of the display unit 5.
FIG. 3 schematically shows a configuration example when the display unit 5 is viewed from the Y direction.
The display unit 5 has a plurality of display modules 9, a unit board 10, and a positioning member 11. In the example shown in FIG. 3, three display modules are arranged in the left-right direction, that is, in the X direction. Of course, the number of display modules 9 included in the display unit 5 is not limited.
For example, the present technology can be applied even when there is only one display module 9. That is, this technique is applicable when one or more display modules 9 are arranged.
 複数の表示モジュール9の各々は、画像を表示可能な表示パネル12(図4参照)を含む。表示パネル12は、画像を表示可能な表示面を有する。表示パネル12としては、液晶、EL(Electro-Luminescence)等を用いた任意の表示デバイスが採用される。
 図3に示すように、複数の表示モジュール9は、各々の表示面がXY平面方向と平行となるように配置される。また複数の表示モジュール9は、複数の表示パネル12が2次元格子状に並ぶように設置される。
 2次元格子状に配置された表示パネル12の表示面により、1つの表示ユニット5の画像表示面6が構成される。
Each of the plurality of display modules 9 includes a display panel 12 (see FIG. 4) capable of displaying an image. The display panel 12 has a display surface capable of displaying an image. As the display panel 12, any display device using a liquid crystal display, EL (Electro-Luminescence), or the like is adopted.
As shown in FIG. 3, the plurality of display modules 9 are arranged so that their display planes are parallel to the XY plane direction. Further, the plurality of display modules 9 are installed so that the plurality of display panels 12 are arranged in a two-dimensional grid pattern.
The display surface of the display panel 12 arranged in a two-dimensional grid pattern constitutes an image display surface 6 of one display unit 5.
 ユニット基板10は、複数の表示モジュール9を支持する。ユニット基板10により、表示モジュール9の背面部13が支持される。なお表示モジュール9の背面部13は、表示面とは反対側の面である。
 例えば、表示モジュール9の背面部13の少なくとも一部が、ユニット基板10に当接されてもよい。あるいは、表示モジュール9の背面部13の全体が位置決め部材11に接続され、当該位置決め部材11がユニット基板10により支持されてもよい。この場合、複数の表示モジュール9は、位置決め部材11を介して、ユニット基板10に支持されることになる。
 ユニット基板10は、例えばアルミニウム等の金属で形成される。その他、ユニット基板10の材料は限定されず、任意の材料が用いられてよい。
 ユニット基板10は、本技術に係る、1以上の表示モジュールを支持する支持部材の一実施形態に相当する。
The unit board 10 supports a plurality of display modules 9. The back surface portion 13 of the display module 9 is supported by the unit substrate 10. The back surface 13 of the display module 9 is a surface opposite to the display surface.
For example, at least a part of the back surface portion 13 of the display module 9 may be in contact with the unit substrate 10. Alternatively, the entire back surface portion 13 of the display module 9 may be connected to the positioning member 11, and the positioning member 11 may be supported by the unit substrate 10. In this case, the plurality of display modules 9 are supported by the unit substrate 10 via the positioning member 11.
The unit substrate 10 is made of a metal such as aluminum. In addition, the material of the unit substrate 10 is not limited, and any material may be used.
The unit substrate 10 corresponds to an embodiment of a support member that supports one or more display modules according to the present technology.
 位置決め部材11は、表示モジュール9の背面部13と、ユニット基板10との間に配置される。
 位置決め部材11は、ユニット基板10に対する複数の表示モジュール9の各々の位置を規定する部材である。本実施形態では、表示パネル12の表示面に平行な方向(XY平面方向)における位置が規定される。
 すなわち位置決め部材11により、各表示モジュール9のX方向及びY方向における位置が規定される。
The positioning member 11 is arranged between the back surface portion 13 of the display module 9 and the unit substrate 10.
The positioning member 11 is a member that defines the position of each of the plurality of display modules 9 with respect to the unit substrate 10. In the present embodiment, the position in the direction parallel to the display surface of the display panel 12 (XY plane direction) is defined.
That is, the positioning member 11 defines the positions of the display modules 9 in the X and Y directions.
 位置決め部材11は、ユニット基板10に対して摺動可能に接続される。すなわち、位置決め部材11はユニット基板に対して完全に固定されず、XY平面方向において所定の範囲で摺動可能に接続される。
 また、複数の表示モジュール9も、XY平面方向において摺動可能に、ユニット基板10に支持される。
 もちろん、表示ユニット5による画像の表示に不具合が発生しない程度に、複数の表示モジュール9及び位置決め部材11は、ユニット基板10に適切に接続される。その一方で、あえてユニット基板10に対して若干の摺動が可能なように、複数の表示モジュール9及び位置決め部材11が接続される。
 位置決め部材11は、例えばカーボン等により形成される。その他、位置決め部材11の材料は限定されず、任意の材料が用いられてよい。
The positioning member 11 is slidably connected to the unit substrate 10. That is, the positioning member 11 is not completely fixed to the unit substrate, but is slidably connected within a predetermined range in the XY plane direction.
Further, the plurality of display modules 9 are also slidably supported by the unit substrate 10 in the XY plane direction.
Of course, the plurality of display modules 9 and the positioning member 11 are appropriately connected to the unit substrate 10 to the extent that the display of the image by the display unit 5 does not cause any trouble. On the other hand, a plurality of display modules 9 and positioning members 11 are connected so that they can be slid slightly with respect to the unit substrate 10.
The positioning member 11 is formed of, for example, carbon or the like. In addition, the material of the positioning member 11 is not limited, and any material may be used.
 図4~図6は、表示ユニット5の具体的な構成例を示す斜視図である。
 図4は、表示ユニット5を、前方側の右上方から見た場合の分解斜視図である。
 図5は、表示ユニット5を、前方側の右上方から見た場合の斜視図であり、複数の表示モジュール9を取り外した場合の図である。
 図6は、表示ユニット5を、後方側の左上方から見た場合の分解斜視図である。
4 to 6 are perspective views showing a specific configuration example of the display unit 5.
FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the display unit 5 when viewed from the upper right on the front side.
FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the display unit 5 when viewed from the upper right on the front side, and is a view when a plurality of display modules 9 are removed.
FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the display unit 5 when viewed from the upper left side on the rear side.
 図4~図6に示すように、表示ユニット5は、複数の表示モジュール9と、ユニット基板10と、位置決め部材11とを有する。
 複数の表示モジュール9の全体、ユニット基板10、及び位置決め部材11の各々の概ねの形状は、平板形状となる。またZ方向から見た場合の、複数の表示モジュール9の全体、ユニット基板10、及び位置決め部材11の各々の外形は、互いに略等しい矩形状となる。
 図4及び図6に示すように、Z方向に沿って、複数の表示モジュール9、ユニット基板10、及び位置決め部材11が組み立てられることで、表示ユニット5が構成される。
As shown in FIGS. 4 to 6, the display unit 5 includes a plurality of display modules 9, a unit board 10, and a positioning member 11.
The overall shape of each of the plurality of display modules 9, the unit substrate 10, and the positioning member 11 is a flat plate shape. Further, when viewed from the Z direction, the entire outer shapes of the plurality of display modules 9, the unit substrate 10, and the positioning member 11 have rectangular shapes that are substantially equal to each other.
As shown in FIGS. 4 and 6, a display unit 5 is configured by assembling a plurality of display modules 9, a unit board 10, and a positioning member 11 along the Z direction.
 図4及び図6に示す例では、X方向(左右方向)に4つ、Y方向(上下方向)に2つの合計8つの表示モジュール9が配置される。
 図4に示すように、表示モジュール9は、左右方向を短手方向、上下方向を長手方向とする矩形状の表示パネル12を有する。Z方向に沿って、表示モジュール9を見た場合の外形も、表示パネル12と同様の矩形状となる。
In the example shown in FIGS. 4 and 6, a total of eight display modules 9 are arranged, four in the X direction (horizontal direction) and two in the Y direction (vertical direction).
As shown in FIG. 4, the display module 9 has a rectangular display panel 12 having a lateral direction as a lateral direction and a vertical direction as a longitudinal direction. When the display module 9 is viewed along the Z direction, the outer shape also has a rectangular shape similar to that of the display panel 12.
 ユニット基板10には、8つの表示モジュール9の各々を支持するための支持機構が構成される。
 支持機構は、1つの表示モジュール9に対して、4つの当接基準面と、4つの磁石とを有する。これらの要素については、後に詳しく説明する。
 またユニット基板10には、位置決め部材11を摺動可能に保持するための取付穴が形成される。
The unit board 10 is configured with a support mechanism for supporting each of the eight display modules 9.
The support mechanism has four contact reference planes and four magnets for one display module 9. These elements will be described in detail later.
Further, the unit substrate 10 is formed with mounting holes for holding the positioning member 11 slidably.
 位置決め部材11は、外枠部16と、中央リブ部17と、3つの仕切りリブ部18とを有する。
 外枠部16は、内部が中空となっている矩形状の枠部である。
 中央リブ部17は、Y方向における中央の位置に、X方向に延在して外枠部16の内部側に構成される。
 3つの仕切りリブ部18は、Y方向において等間隔に並ぶように、X方向に延在して外枠部の内部側に構成される。
 外枠部16、中央リブ部17、及び3つの仕切りリブ部18により、8つの表示モジュール9に対応した、8つの開口部19が構成される。各開口部19において、開口部19の周縁に位置する部分が、表示モジュール9の背面部13の周縁に対応する部分となる。
The positioning member 11 has an outer frame portion 16, a central rib portion 17, and three partition rib portions 18.
The outer frame portion 16 is a rectangular frame portion having a hollow inside.
The central rib portion 17 extends in the X direction at the central position in the Y direction and is configured on the inner side of the outer frame portion 16.
The three partition rib portions 18 extend in the X direction so as to be arranged at equal intervals in the Y direction, and are configured on the inner side of the outer frame portion.
The outer frame portion 16, the central rib portion 17, and the three partition rib portions 18 constitute eight openings 19 corresponding to the eight display modules 9. In each opening 19, a portion located on the peripheral edge of the opening 19 is a portion corresponding to the peripheral edge of the back surface portion 13 of the display module 9.
 図5に示すように、ユニット基板10に、位置決め部材11が接続される。上記したように、位置決め部材11は、ユニット基板10に摺動可能に接続される。
 そのために、位置決め部材11には、貫通穴が形成される。また位置決め部材11をユニット基板10に対して摺動可能に接続するための部材として、段付きネジが用いられる。
As shown in FIG. 5, the positioning member 11 is connected to the unit substrate 10. As described above, the positioning member 11 is slidably connected to the unit substrate 10.
Therefore, a through hole is formed in the positioning member 11. Further, a stepped screw is used as a member for slidably connecting the positioning member 11 to the unit substrate 10.
 [位置決め部材とユニット基板との接続]
 図7~図9を参照して、位置決め部材11とユニット基板10との接続について説明する。
 図7~図9では、位置決め部材11とユニット基板10との接続に関連する部分を中心に図示がなされており、当該接続に関連しない部分については、図示が省略されている部分もある。
 すなわち、各図において、本技術に係る表示装置100及び表示ユニット5が有する種々の特徴を説明する際に、説明の対象となる特徴を分かりやすくするために、他の特徴に関連する部分について図示が省略される場合があり得る。
 また、ある特徴を説明する際に複数の図面が参照される場合に、各図面において、形状や位置等が、若干異なって図示されている場合もあり得る。そのような場合において、各々の図がいずれも、本技術に係る実施形態として成り立ち得る。
[Connection between positioning member and unit board]
The connection between the positioning member 11 and the unit substrate 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 9.
In FIGS. 7 to 9, the illustration is centered on the portion related to the connection between the positioning member 11 and the unit substrate 10, and the portion not related to the connection is not shown in some parts.
That is, in each figure, when explaining various features of the display device 100 and the display unit 5 according to the present technology, in order to make it easy to understand the features to be explained, the parts related to the other features are illustrated. May be omitted.
Further, when a plurality of drawings are referred to when explaining a certain feature, the shapes, positions, and the like may be slightly different in each drawing. In such a case, each of the figures can be established as an embodiment according to the present technology.
 図7は、表示ユニット5を前方側から見た場合の、表示ユニット5の右上方の部分を拡大して示す、分解斜視図である。
 図8は、図7に示す拡大部分を、後方側から見た場合の分解斜視図である。
 図9は、図7に示す拡大部分の段付きネジ22の中心を通るように、Y方向に垂直な面(XZ平面)で切断した場合の断面図の一部である。
FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view showing an enlarged upper right portion of the display unit 5 when the display unit 5 is viewed from the front side.
FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the enlarged portion shown in FIG. 7 when viewed from the rear side.
FIG. 9 is a part of a cross-sectional view when cut in a plane (XZ plane) perpendicular to the Y direction so as to pass through the center of the stepped screw 22 in the enlarged portion shown in FIG. 7.
 本実施形態では、段付きネジ22により位置決め部材11とユニット基板10とが接続される。具体的には、段付きネジ22が位置決め部材11に形成された貫通穴23を貫通し、ユニット基板10に形成された取付穴24に嵌合されることで、位置決め部材11とユニット基板10とが接続される。 In this embodiment, the positioning member 11 and the unit board 10 are connected by the stepped screw 22. Specifically, the stepped screw 22 penetrates the through hole 23 formed in the positioning member 11 and is fitted into the mounting hole 24 formed in the unit substrate 10, whereby the positioning member 11 and the unit substrate 10 are formed. Is connected.
 図7に示すように、位置決め部材11に、複数の貫通穴23が形成される。
 本実施形態では、円形状の貫通穴23が形成される。もちろん、貫通穴23の具体的な形状は限定されない。
As shown in FIG. 7, a plurality of through holes 23 are formed in the positioning member 11.
In this embodiment, a circular through hole 23 is formed. Of course, the specific shape of the through hole 23 is not limited.
 図4に示す例では、1つの位置決め部材11に対して15個の貫通穴23が形成される。
 貫通穴23は、位置決め部材11の外枠部16、及び3つの仕切りリブ部18に形成される。
 図4に示すように、矩形状からなる外枠部16の左辺に2つの貫通穴23が形成される。2つの貫通穴23は、Y方向において、中央リブ部17よりも上方の位置と、下方の位置とにそれぞれ形成される。
 同様に、外枠部16の右辺にも、中央リブ部17よりも上方の位置に1つ、下方の位置に1つ、合計2つの貫通穴23が形成される。
In the example shown in FIG. 4, 15 through holes 23 are formed for one positioning member 11.
The through hole 23 is formed in the outer frame portion 16 of the positioning member 11 and the three partition rib portions 18.
As shown in FIG. 4, two through holes 23 are formed on the left side of the rectangular outer frame portion 16. The two through holes 23 are formed at a position above and below the central rib portion 17 in the Y direction, respectively.
Similarly, on the right side of the outer frame portion 16, a total of two through holes 23 are formed, one at a position above the central rib portion 17 and one at a position below the central rib portion 17.
 3つの仕切りリブ部18のうち、最も左側に位置する仕切りリブ部18には、4つの貫通穴23が形成される。貫通穴23は、Y方向において、中央リブ部17よりも上方の位置に2つ、下方の位置に2つ形成される。
 本実施形態では、上方の位置に形成される2つの貫通穴23のうち、一方が外枠部16の上辺に近接して構成される。また、下方に形成される2つの貫通穴23のうち、一方が外枠部16の下辺に近接して構成される。
 同様に、最も右側に位置する仕切りリブ部18上にも、4つの貫通穴23が形成される。
 中央に位置する仕切りリブ部18には、3つの貫通穴23が形成される。3つの貫通穴23は、外枠部16の上辺の近傍、外枠部16の下辺の近傍、及び中央リブ部17の近傍に1つずつ形成される。
Of the three partition rib portions 18, the partition rib portion 18 located on the leftmost side is formed with four through holes 23. Two through holes 23 are formed at a position above the central rib portion 17 and two at a position below the central rib portion 17 in the Y direction.
In the present embodiment, one of the two through holes 23 formed at the upper position is configured close to the upper side of the outer frame portion 16. Further, one of the two through holes 23 formed below is configured close to the lower side of the outer frame portion 16.
Similarly, four through holes 23 are formed on the partition rib portion 18 located on the far right side.
Three through holes 23 are formed in the partition rib portion 18 located at the center. The three through holes 23 are formed one by one in the vicinity of the upper side of the outer frame portion 16, the vicinity of the lower side of the outer frame portion 16, and the vicinity of the central rib portion 17.
 すなわち、前方側から見た場合に、貫通穴23は、外枠部16の左辺に2つ、外枠部16の右辺に2つ、左側の仕切りリブ部18に4つ、中央の仕切りリブ部18に3つ、左側の仕切りリブ部18に4つ、合計15個形成される。
 もちろん、位置決め部材11に形成される貫通穴23の数や位置は限定されない。
That is, when viewed from the front side, there are two through holes 23 on the left side of the outer frame portion 16, two on the right side of the outer frame portion 16, four on the left partition rib portion 18, and a central partition rib portion. A total of 15 pieces are formed, 3 in 18 and 4 in the left partition rib portion 18.
Of course, the number and positions of the through holes 23 formed in the positioning member 11 are not limited.
 図7及び図8に示す例では、外枠部16の上辺の右端の近傍、及び右側の仕切りリブ部18の上辺近傍に、貫通穴23が形成される。 In the examples shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, through holes 23 are formed in the vicinity of the right end of the upper side of the outer frame portion 16 and in the vicinity of the upper side of the partition rib portion 18 on the right side.
 図7に示すように、ユニット基板10に、複数の取付穴24が形成される。
 取付穴24は、位置決め部材11に形成される貫通穴23に対応する位置に形成される。例えば、ユニット基板10に対して所望の位置に位置決め部材11を配置した際に、貫通穴23の中心となる位置に、取付穴24が形成される。もちろんこれに限定されず、貫通穴23の中心からオフセットした位置に取付穴24が形成されてもよい。
 本実施形態では、取付穴24には、段付きネジ22と嵌合するためのネジ山が形成される。
As shown in FIG. 7, a plurality of mounting holes 24 are formed in the unit substrate 10.
The mounting hole 24 is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 23 formed in the positioning member 11. For example, when the positioning member 11 is arranged at a desired position with respect to the unit substrate 10, the mounting hole 24 is formed at a position centered on the through hole 23. Of course, the present invention is not limited to this, and the mounting hole 24 may be formed at a position offset from the center of the through hole 23.
In the present embodiment, the mounting hole 24 is formed with a screw thread for fitting with the stepped screw 22.
 図4に示す例では、ユニット基板10に対して、位置決め部材11の貫通穴23に対応した位置に、15個の取付穴24が形成されている。
 図7に示すユニット基板10においても、2つの貫通穴23に対応する位置に2つの取付穴24が形成されている。
 もちろん、ユニット基板10に形成される取付穴24の数や位置は、貫通穴23の数や位置に応じて、任意に設計されてよい。
In the example shown in FIG. 4, 15 mounting holes 24 are formed at positions corresponding to the through holes 23 of the positioning member 11 with respect to the unit substrate 10.
Also in the unit substrate 10 shown in FIG. 7, two mounting holes 24 are formed at positions corresponding to the two through holes 23.
Of course, the number and positions of the mounting holes 24 formed in the unit substrate 10 may be arbitrarily designed according to the number and positions of the through holes 23.
 図9に示すように、段付きネジ22は、頭部27と、段部28と、ネジ部29とを有する。段付きネジ22は、前方側から後方側に向くように、取付けられる。
 頭部27は、円板形状からなる。頭部27は、円形状の前方面、及び円形状の後方面を有する。
 段部28は、円柱形状からなる。段部28は、頭部27の後方面の中心に、後方側に延在するように連結される。段部28のZ方向におけるサイズは、位置決め部材11の厚みに応じて設計される。
 ネジ部29は、段部28の後方側の端面の中心に、後方側に延在するように連結される。ネジ部29には、ユニット基板10に形成される取付穴24のネジ山に嵌合するように、ネジ山が構成される。
As shown in FIG. 9, the stepped screw 22 has a head portion 27, a stepped portion 28, and a threaded portion 29. The stepped screw 22 is attached so as to face from the front side to the rear side.
The head 27 has a disk shape. The head 27 has a circular front surface and a circular rear surface.
The step portion 28 has a cylindrical shape. The step 28 is connected to the center of the rear surface of the head 27 so as to extend to the rear side. The size of the step 28 in the Z direction is designed according to the thickness of the positioning member 11.
The threaded portion 29 is connected to the center of the rear end surface of the stepped portion 28 so as to extend to the rear side. The screw portion 29 is configured with a screw thread so as to fit into the screw thread of the mounting hole 24 formed in the unit substrate 10.
 段付きネジ22を前方側から見た場合に、頭部27の直径、段部28の直径、ネジ部29の直径は、この順番に小さくなる。従って、段部28とネジ部29との連結部分には、段差が構成される。
 段部28の直径は、ネジ部29が挿入されて嵌合される取付穴24の直径よりも大きくなるように構成される。従って、取付穴24に対して段付きネジ22を回転させて嵌合させると、取付穴24の周辺の部分(すなわちユニット基板10)と、段部28の後方側の端面が当接する。
 また、頭部27は、貫通穴23よりも大きいサイズを有する。具体的には、頭部27の直径が、位置決め部材11に形成される貫通穴23の直径よりも大きくなるように構成される。
 段付きネジ22は、例えば鉄等の金属材料で形成される。もちろん段付きネジ22の材料は限定されず、任意の材料が用いられてよい。段付きネジ22は、本技術に係る、貫通穴を貫通し取付穴に嵌合され、位置決め部材を支持部材に対して摺動可能に接続する嵌合部材の一実施形態に相当する。
When the stepped screw 22 is viewed from the front side, the diameter of the head 27, the diameter of the stepped portion 28, and the diameter of the threaded portion 29 decrease in this order. Therefore, a step is formed at the connecting portion between the step portion 28 and the screw portion 29.
The diameter of the step 28 is configured to be larger than the diameter of the mounting hole 24 into which the thread 29 is inserted and fitted. Therefore, when the stepped screw 22 is rotated and fitted to the mounting hole 24, the peripheral portion of the mounting hole 24 (that is, the unit substrate 10) comes into contact with the rear end surface of the stepped portion 28.
Further, the head 27 has a size larger than that of the through hole 23. Specifically, the diameter of the head 27 is configured to be larger than the diameter of the through hole 23 formed in the positioning member 11.
The stepped screw 22 is made of a metal material such as iron. Of course, the material of the stepped screw 22 is not limited, and any material may be used. The stepped screw 22 corresponds to one embodiment of the fitting member according to the present technology, which is fitted into the mounting hole through the through hole and slidably connects the positioning member to the support member.
 図9に示すように、段付きネジ22は、位置決め部材11上に形成された貫通穴23を貫通し、ユニット基板10上に形成された取付穴24に嵌合される。これにより、位置決め部材11は、段付きネジ22の頭部27と、ユニット基板10とに挟まれて固定される。
 本実施形態では、位置決め部材11が、ユニット基板10に対してX方向及びY方向に摺動可能となるように、段付きネジ22が取付穴24に嵌合される。例えば、段部28のZ方向におけるサイズを調整することで、位置決め部材11が固定されすぎず、また固定力が弱すぎない程度に、位置決め部材11をユニット基板10に接続することが可能となる。
 もちろん、取付穴24に段付きネジ22を嵌合させる際の、回転量が調節されてもよい。
As shown in FIG. 9, the stepped screw 22 penetrates the through hole 23 formed on the positioning member 11 and is fitted into the mounting hole 24 formed on the unit substrate 10. As a result, the positioning member 11 is sandwiched and fixed between the head portion 27 of the stepped screw 22 and the unit substrate 10.
In the present embodiment, the stepped screw 22 is fitted into the mounting hole 24 so that the positioning member 11 can slide in the X direction and the Y direction with respect to the unit substrate 10. For example, by adjusting the size of the step portion 28 in the Z direction, the positioning member 11 can be connected to the unit substrate 10 to the extent that the positioning member 11 is not too fixed and the fixing force is not too weak. ..
Of course, the amount of rotation when fitting the stepped screw 22 into the mounting hole 24 may be adjusted.
 ユニット基板10に対する位置決め部材11の摺動可能範囲が規定されてもよい。
 例えば、図9等に示す例では、位置決め部材11に形成される貫通穴23の直径により、位置決め部材11の摺動可能範囲を規定することが可能となる。
 貫通穴23の直径を大きくすれば、摺動可能範囲を大きくすることが可能となる。また貫通穴23の直径を小さくすれば、摺動可能範囲を小さくすることが可能となる。このように、貫通穴23の径(半径でもよい)により、摺動可能範囲が規定されてもよい。
 その他、位置決め部材11の摺動可能範囲を規定するための任意の構成が採用されてよい。
The slidable range of the positioning member 11 with respect to the unit substrate 10 may be defined.
For example, in the example shown in FIG. 9 and the like, the slidable range of the positioning member 11 can be defined by the diameter of the through hole 23 formed in the positioning member 11.
If the diameter of the through hole 23 is increased, the slidable range can be increased. Further, if the diameter of the through hole 23 is reduced, the slidable range can be reduced. In this way, the slidable range may be defined by the diameter (which may be a radius) of the through hole 23.
In addition, an arbitrary configuration for defining the slidable range of the positioning member 11 may be adopted.
 ユニット基板10に対して位置決め部材11を摺動可能に接続するために、バネ等の付勢部材が用いられてもよい。例えば、付勢部材により、段付きネジ22がユニット基板10側に付勢される。付勢部材の付勢力を適宜調整することで、段付きネジ22の頭部27が位置決め部材11を押圧する押圧力を調整することが可能となる。
 その他、押圧力を適当な大きさに定めるために、任意の構成が採用されてよい。
An urging member such as a spring may be used to slidably connect the positioning member 11 to the unit substrate 10. For example, the stepped screw 22 is urged toward the unit board 10 by the urging member. By appropriately adjusting the urging force of the urging member, it is possible to adjust the pressing force on which the head 27 of the stepped screw 22 presses the positioning member 11.
In addition, any configuration may be adopted in order to set the pressing force to an appropriate size.
 ユニット基板10に対して位置決め部材11が摺動可能に接続されることにより、ユニット基板10に変形等が発生した場合に、位置決め部材11への影響を抑制することが可能となる。
 例えば、ユニット基板10がアルミニウム等の金属により形成される。また、位置決め部材11は、カーボン等により形成される。アルミニウム等の金属はカーボン等に比べて熱膨張率が高く、温度変化に伴う表面積の変化率が高くなる。従って、例えば表示装置100が設置される空間の気温が上昇した場合に、ユニット基板10の表面積は、位置決め部材11の表面積に比べて大きく増加する。
 このような熱膨張率の差によりユニット基板10が変形した場合でも、位置決め部材11がユニット基板10に対して相対的に摺動してスライドする。これにより、ユニット基板10の変形に応じて発生する応力が、位置決め部材11に加わることを抑制することが可能となる。
By slidably connecting the positioning member 11 to the unit substrate 10, it is possible to suppress the influence on the positioning member 11 when the unit substrate 10 is deformed or the like.
For example, the unit substrate 10 is formed of a metal such as aluminum. Further, the positioning member 11 is formed of carbon or the like. Metals such as aluminum have a higher coefficient of thermal expansion than carbon and the like, and the rate of change in surface area with temperature changes is higher. Therefore, for example, when the temperature of the space in which the display device 100 is installed rises, the surface area of the unit substrate 10 increases significantly as compared with the surface area of the positioning member 11.
Even when the unit substrate 10 is deformed due to such a difference in the coefficient of thermal expansion, the positioning member 11 slides and slides relative to the unit substrate 10. This makes it possible to suppress the stress generated by the deformation of the unit substrate 10 from being applied to the positioning member 11.
 なお、ユニット基板10の変形量を考慮して、位置決め部材11の摺動可能範囲が設定されてもよい。
 例えば、図9に示す貫通穴23の径を大きくして、摺動可能範囲を大きくする。これにより、ユニット基板10が大きく変形した場合にも、位置決め部材11への変形の影響を抑制することが可能となる。
 また、ユニット基板10の変形量が小さいと予想される場合には、あえて貫通穴23の直径が小さく設定されてもよい。
The slidable range of the positioning member 11 may be set in consideration of the amount of deformation of the unit substrate 10.
For example, the diameter of the through hole 23 shown in FIG. 9 is increased to increase the slidable range. As a result, even when the unit substrate 10 is significantly deformed, it is possible to suppress the influence of the deformation on the positioning member 11.
Further, when the amount of deformation of the unit substrate 10 is expected to be small, the diameter of the through hole 23 may be set to be small.
 [複数の表示モジュールの取付]
 図5に例示するように、ユニット基板10に対して、位置決め部材11が摺動可能に接続される。ユニット基板10に接続された位置決め部材11を基準として、複数の表示モジュール9が取付けられる。
 図4に示す例では、8つの表示モジュール9が、位置決め部材11に形成された8つの開口部19の位置に取付けられる。
[Installation of multiple display modules]
As illustrated in FIG. 5, the positioning member 11 is slidably connected to the unit substrate 10. A plurality of display modules 9 are mounted with reference to the positioning member 11 connected to the unit board 10.
In the example shown in FIG. 4, eight display modules 9 are mounted at the positions of eight openings 19 formed in the positioning member 11.
 図10は、表示ユニット5を前方側から見た場合の、表示ユニット5の上辺部分を、Y方向に垂直な面(XZ平面)で切断した場合の断面図の一部である。また図10は、表示ユニット5の右上方の隅部付近の断面図に相当する。
 図11は、図10に示す断面を、後方側から見た場合の斜視図である。
 図12は、表示モジュール9の背面部13の構成例を示す斜視図である。図12は、図4に示す8つの表示モジュール9のうち、右上方の表示モジュール9の、右上方の隅部を後方側から見た図に相当する。
FIG. 10 is a part of a cross-sectional view when the display unit 5 is viewed from the front side and the upper side portion of the display unit 5 is cut by a plane (XZ plane) perpendicular to the Y direction. Further, FIG. 10 corresponds to a cross-sectional view of the vicinity of the upper right corner of the display unit 5.
FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the cross section shown in FIG. 10 when viewed from the rear side.
FIG. 12 is a perspective view showing a configuration example of the back surface portion 13 of the display module 9. FIG. 12 corresponds to a view of the upper right corner of the upper right display module 9 of the eight display modules 9 shown in FIG. 4 as viewed from the rear side.
 ユニット基板10には、表示モジュール9を支持するための支持機構が構成される。
 支持機構は、各表示モジュール9に対して構成される。具体的には、各開口部19の周縁部分に対応する位置に構成され、各表示モジュール9を支持する。
 本実施形態では、支持機構は、4つの磁石33と、4つの当接基準面34とを有する。
 4つの磁石33は、開口部19の4隅に対応する位置にて、ユニット基板10に埋設される。従って、ユニット基板10に、合計32個の磁石33が設置される。
 4つの当接基準面34も、開口部19の4隅に対応する位置に構成される。従って、磁石33と当接基準面34とは、互いに近傍となる位置に構成される。
The unit board 10 is configured with a support mechanism for supporting the display module 9.
The support mechanism is configured for each display module 9. Specifically, it is configured at a position corresponding to the peripheral edge portion of each opening 19 and supports each display module 9.
In this embodiment, the support mechanism has four magnets 33 and four contact reference surfaces 34.
The four magnets 33 are embedded in the unit substrate 10 at positions corresponding to the four corners of the opening 19. Therefore, a total of 32 magnets 33 are installed on the unit substrate 10.
The four contact reference surfaces 34 are also configured at positions corresponding to the four corners of the opening 19. Therefore, the magnet 33 and the contact reference surface 34 are configured at positions close to each other.
 図4に示す例では、ユニット基板10は、外枠部35と、底面部36とを有する。ユニット基板10をZ方向から見た場合に、外枠部35は、矩形状を有する。底面部36は、Z方向に垂直な平面形状からなり、外枠部35の後方側に連結される。外枠部35の内部側の空間であり、底面部36の前方側の空間が、複数の表示モジュール9を支持する空間となる。
 図4に示すように、底面部36の所定の位置には、Z方向に沿って前方側に延在する支持凸部37が構成される。複数の支持凸部37は、各開口部19の4隅に対応する位置に構成される。複数の支持凸部37は、支持機構に含まれる要素となる。
In the example shown in FIG. 4, the unit substrate 10 has an outer frame portion 35 and a bottom surface portion 36. When the unit substrate 10 is viewed from the Z direction, the outer frame portion 35 has a rectangular shape. The bottom surface portion 36 has a planar shape perpendicular to the Z direction, and is connected to the rear side of the outer frame portion 35. The space on the inner side of the outer frame portion 35, and the space on the front side of the bottom surface portion 36 is a space for supporting the plurality of display modules 9.
As shown in FIG. 4, at a predetermined position of the bottom surface portion 36, a support convex portion 37 extending forward along the Z direction is configured. The plurality of support convex portions 37 are configured at positions corresponding to the four corners of each opening 19. The plurality of support convex portions 37 are elements included in the support mechanism.
 本実施形態では、外枠部35の、各開口部19の4隅に対応する位置に磁石33が埋設される。また、各開口部19の4隅に対応する位置に構成された支持凸部37に磁石33が埋設される。
 また外枠部35の、各開口部19の4隅に対応する位置(磁石33の近傍の位置)の前面に、当接基準面34が形成される。また各開口部19の4隅に対応する位置に構成された支持凸部37の前面に、当接基準面34が形成される。
 当接基準面34は、底面部36からの高さ、及び平面度が、機械加工により精密に加工されている。外枠部35、及び支持凸部37に形成された複数の当接基準面34は、同一平面上に高い精度で形成されている。
In the present embodiment, the magnet 33 is embedded in the outer frame portion 35 at positions corresponding to the four corners of each opening 19. Further, the magnet 33 is embedded in the support convex portion 37 configured at the position corresponding to the four corners of each opening 19.
Further, a contact reference surface 34 is formed on the front surface of the outer frame portion 35 at positions corresponding to the four corners of each opening 19 (positions in the vicinity of the magnet 33). Further, a contact reference surface 34 is formed on the front surface of the support convex portion 37 configured at positions corresponding to the four corners of each opening 19.
The height and flatness of the contact reference surface 34 from the bottom surface portion 36 are precisely machined. The plurality of contact reference surfaces 34 formed on the outer frame portion 35 and the support convex portion 37 are formed on the same plane with high accuracy.
 図10及び図11に示すように、位置決め部材11は、各表示モジュール9に対して、所定の位置に構成された1以上の目印を有する。1以上の目印は、ユニット基板10に対して、表示モジュール9を配置する際に、基準となる目印である。
 本実施形態では、目印として、開口部19の周縁部分に位置決め穴40が形成される。例えば、開口部19の周縁部分の4隅に位置決め穴40が形成される。あるいは、開口部19の周縁部分の1つの辺の両端に位置決め穴40が形成される。その他の構成が採用されてもよい。
 また位置決め部材11は、各表示モジュール9に対して、4つの当接用貫通穴41を有する。当接用貫通穴41は、開口部19の4隅に、ユニット基板10の4つの当接基準面34に対応する位置に形成される。
 ユニット基板10に位置決め部材11が接続された状態では、4つの当接用貫通穴41から、ユニット基板10の4つの当接基準面34が見える状態となる。
 一方で、ユニット基板10に位置決め部材11が接続された状態では、ユニット基板10に埋設された4つの磁石33の位置は、位置決め部材11により覆われる状態となる。
As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the positioning member 11 has one or more marks configured at predetermined positions for each display module 9. The one or more marks are reference marks when the display module 9 is arranged with respect to the unit board 10.
In the present embodiment, a positioning hole 40 is formed in the peripheral portion of the opening 19 as a mark. For example, positioning holes 40 are formed at the four corners of the peripheral edge of the opening 19. Alternatively, positioning holes 40 are formed at both ends of one side of the peripheral edge portion of the opening 19. Other configurations may be adopted.
Further, the positioning member 11 has four contact through holes 41 for each display module 9. The contact through holes 41 are formed at the four corners of the opening 19 at positions corresponding to the four contact reference surfaces 34 of the unit substrate 10.
When the positioning member 11 is connected to the unit board 10, the four contact reference surfaces 34 of the unit board 10 can be seen from the four contact through holes 41.
On the other hand, when the positioning member 11 is connected to the unit substrate 10, the positions of the four magnets 33 embedded in the unit substrate 10 are covered by the positioning member 11.
 図12に示すように、表示モジュール9の背面部13には、磁性体部材44と、位置決めピン45と、当接用凸部46とが構成される。
 磁性体部材44は、背面部13の4隅に設置される。磁性体部材44は、ユニット基板10に埋設された4つの磁石33に対応する位置に設置される。
 位置決めピン45は、位置決め部材11に形成された位置決め穴40に対応する位置に設置される。
As shown in FIG. 12, the back surface portion 13 of the display module 9 includes a magnetic material member 44, a positioning pin 45, and a contact convex portion 46.
The magnetic member 44 is installed at the four corners of the back surface portion 13. The magnetic member 44 is installed at a position corresponding to the four magnets 33 embedded in the unit substrate 10.
The positioning pin 45 is installed at a position corresponding to the positioning hole 40 formed in the positioning member 11.
 図12に示す例では、各表示モジュール9において、表示パネル12の後方側に、補強部材47が設けられる。
 表示パネル12は、例えばガラス等の強度が低い材料から形成される。補強部材47が接続されることにより、表示パネル12の強度が上昇し、衝撃による破壊が防止される。
 補強部材47は、例えばカーボン等の剛性が高い材料により形成される。もちろん補強部材47の材料や形状等の、具体的な構成は限定されない。
In the example shown in FIG. 12, in each display module 9, a reinforcing member 47 is provided on the rear side of the display panel 12.
The display panel 12 is formed of a low-strength material such as glass. By connecting the reinforcing member 47, the strength of the display panel 12 is increased, and the destruction due to the impact is prevented.
The reinforcing member 47 is formed of a highly rigid material such as carbon. Of course, the specific configuration such as the material and shape of the reinforcing member 47 is not limited.
 位置決めピン45は、補強部材47に固定される。
 例えば接着剤等を用いた接着により、位置決めピン45が補強部材47に固定される。その他、位置決めピン45を補強部材47に対して固定可能な任意の固定方法が採用されてよい。
 位置決めピン45は、本技術に係るピン部材の一実施形態に相当する。
The positioning pin 45 is fixed to the reinforcing member 47.
For example, the positioning pin 45 is fixed to the reinforcing member 47 by adhesion using an adhesive or the like. In addition, any fixing method capable of fixing the positioning pin 45 to the reinforcing member 47 may be adopted.
The positioning pin 45 corresponds to one embodiment of the pin member according to the present technology.
 当接用凸部46は、後方側の端部に、当接基準面48が構成される。本実施形態では、4つの当接用凸部46が、位置決め部材11に形成された4つの当接用貫通穴41に対応する位置に形成される。すなわち、4つの当接用凸部46は、ユニット基板10の4つの当接基準面34に対応する位置に形成される。
 当接用凸部46の高さは、機械加工により精密に加工されている。すなわち当接基準面48のZ方向における位置は、精密に規定されている。また当接基準面48の平面度も、機械加工により精密に加工されている。各表示モジュール9において、複数の当接基準面48は、同一平面上に高い精度で形成されている。
The contact reference surface 48 is formed at the rear end of the contact convex portion 46. In the present embodiment, the four contact convex portions 46 are formed at positions corresponding to the four contact through holes 41 formed in the positioning member 11. That is, the four contact convex portions 46 are formed at positions corresponding to the four contact reference surfaces 34 of the unit substrate 10.
The height of the abutting convex portion 46 is precisely machined. That is, the position of the contact reference surface 48 in the Z direction is precisely defined. Further, the flatness of the contact reference surface 48 is also precisely machined. In each display module 9, the plurality of contact reference surfaces 48 are formed on the same plane with high accuracy.
 8つの表示モジュール9の各々は、位置決めピン45が、位置決め部材11に形成された位置決め穴40と嵌合するように、ユニット基板10に対して配置される。
 これにより、ユニット基板10に埋設された4つの磁石33と、表示モジュール9の背面部13に配置された4つの磁性体部材44とが、磁力により吸着する。図10及び図11に示すように、磁石33と磁性体部材44とは、位置決め部材11を挟むようにして吸着される。
 このように、8つの表示モジュール9の各々は、磁石33と磁性体部材44との間に作用する磁力により、ユニット基板10に支持される。従って表示モジュール9は、ユニット基板10に対してX方向及びY方向にて摺動可能に接続される。
 磁性体としては、例えば鉄等の任意の金属材料が用いられてよい。もちろん、その他の磁性体材料が用いられてもよい。例えば、磁石が用いられて、ユニット基板に埋設された磁石33と吸着されてもよい。
Each of the eight display modules 9 is arranged with respect to the unit substrate 10 so that the positioning pin 45 fits into the positioning hole 40 formed in the positioning member 11.
As a result, the four magnets 33 embedded in the unit substrate 10 and the four magnetic material members 44 arranged on the back surface portion 13 of the display module 9 are attracted by magnetic force. As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the magnet 33 and the magnetic member 44 are attracted to each other so as to sandwich the positioning member 11.
In this way, each of the eight display modules 9 is supported by the unit substrate 10 by the magnetic force acting between the magnet 33 and the magnetic member 44. Therefore, the display module 9 is slidably connected to the unit substrate 10 in the X direction and the Y direction.
As the magnetic material, any metal material such as iron may be used. Of course, other magnetic materials may be used. For example, a magnet may be used to be attracted to the magnet 33 embedded in the unit substrate.
 また、ユニット基板10の4つの当接基準面34と、表示モジュール9の背面部13に構成された4つの当接基準面48とが当接する。
 当接基準面34と当接基準面48とが互いに当接することにより、ユニット基板10に対する各表示モジュール9の、Z方向における位置が規定される。当接基準面34及び当接基準面48は、高さと平面度が精密に規定されているので、各表示モジュール9は、Z方向において高い精度で位置決めされる。また各表示モジュール9の表示面も、高い精度でXY平面方向に揃えられる。
 もちろん、当接基準面34及び当接基準面48の高さ等は、任意に設計されてよい。
Further, the four contact reference surfaces 34 of the unit substrate 10 and the four contact reference surfaces 48 configured on the back surface portion 13 of the display module 9 come into contact with each other.
The contact reference surface 34 and the contact reference surface 48 abut on each other to define the position of each display module 9 with respect to the unit substrate 10 in the Z direction. Since the height and flatness of the contact reference surface 34 and the contact reference surface 48 are precisely defined, each display module 9 is positioned with high accuracy in the Z direction. Further, the display surface of each display module 9 is also aligned in the XY plane direction with high accuracy.
Of course, the heights of the contact reference surface 34 and the contact reference surface 48 may be arbitrarily designed.
 本実施形態では、図10及び図11に示すように、位置決めピン45と位置決め穴40とは、隙間を生じることなく嵌合される。これにより、X方向及びY方向における位置決めを、精度よく行うことが可能となる。また、ユニット基板10に対して、位置決め部材11と複数の表示モジュール9とが一体的に摺動可能となる。
 Z方向においては、位置決めピン45とユニット基板10との間に若干の隙間が生じるように、位置決めピン45の長さが設定される。すなわち、位置決めピン45のZ方向に沿った長さは、表示ユニット5が組み立てられた場合に、位置決めピン45の先端がユニット基板10の前方側の面に当接しないように設定される。
 これにより、表示モジュール9のZ方向における位置決めを行う、当接基準面34及び当接基準面48の当接を妨げることが防止されている。もちろん、位置決めピン45の長さはX方向及びY方向の位置決めが可能な範囲で決定される。
In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the positioning pin 45 and the positioning hole 40 are fitted without forming a gap. This makes it possible to perform positioning in the X direction and the Y direction with high accuracy. Further, the positioning member 11 and the plurality of display modules 9 can be integrally slid with respect to the unit substrate 10.
In the Z direction, the length of the positioning pin 45 is set so that a slight gap is formed between the positioning pin 45 and the unit substrate 10. That is, the length of the positioning pin 45 along the Z direction is set so that the tip of the positioning pin 45 does not abut on the front surface of the unit substrate 10 when the display unit 5 is assembled.
This prevents the display module 9 from hindering the contact between the contact reference surface 34 and the contact reference surface 48, which positions the display module 9 in the Z direction. Of course, the length of the positioning pin 45 is determined within a range in which positioning in the X direction and the Y direction is possible.
 本実施形態では、位置決めピン45と位置決め穴40とが嵌合されることで、位置決め部材11に対して、表示モジュール9が固定される。そして、ユニット基板10に対して、表示モジュール9及び位置決め部材11が、一体的に摺動可能に構成される。
 従って、例えばユニット基板10が温度変化等により変形した場合に、複数の表示モジュール9及び位置決め部材11は一体となって、ユニット基板10に対して相対的に摺動してスライドすることが可能である。これにより、ユニット基板10の変形に応じて発生する応力が、複数の表示モジュール9及び位置決め部材11に加わることを抑制することが可能となる。
In the present embodiment, the display module 9 is fixed to the positioning member 11 by fitting the positioning pin 45 and the positioning hole 40. Then, the display module 9 and the positioning member 11 are integrally slidable with respect to the unit substrate 10.
Therefore, for example, when the unit substrate 10 is deformed due to a temperature change or the like, the plurality of display modules 9 and the positioning member 11 can be integrated and slide relative to the unit substrate 10. be. This makes it possible to suppress the stress generated by the deformation of the unit substrate 10 from being applied to the plurality of display modules 9 and the positioning member 11.
 位置決め部材11に形成される目印の構成として、任意の構成が採用されてよい。
 例えば、位置決め部材11に、位置決めピン45が形成されてもよい。そして、表示モジュール9に位置決め穴40が形成されてもよい。この場合、各表示モジュール9は、位置決め穴40が、位置決め部材11に形成された位置決めピン45と嵌合するように、ユニット基板10に対して配置される。これにより、表示モジュール9のX方向及びY方向の位置決めを、精度よく実現することが可能となる。
 その他、任意の構成が採用されてよい。
Any configuration may be adopted as the configuration of the mark formed on the positioning member 11.
For example, the positioning pin 45 may be formed on the positioning member 11. Then, the positioning hole 40 may be formed in the display module 9. In this case, each display module 9 is arranged with respect to the unit substrate 10 so that the positioning hole 40 fits with the positioning pin 45 formed on the positioning member 11. This makes it possible to accurately position the display module 9 in the X direction and the Y direction.
In addition, any configuration may be adopted.
 位置決め部材11と、表示モジュール9とが、ネジ等の締結部材による締結、接着剤等を用いた接着、溶着等により、接続されてもよい。この場合でも、ユニット基板10に対して、表示モジュール9及び位置決め部材11が、一体的に摺動可能に構成される。従って、ユニット基板10の変形に応じて発生する応力が、複数の表示モジュール9及び位置決め部材11に加わることを抑制することが可能となる。
 例えば、締結部材の取付位置や、接着剤の塗布位置等を適宜設計することで、表示モジュール9のX方向及びY方向における位置決めを行いつつ、表示モジュール9を位置決め部材11に接続することも可能である。この場合、例えば、ネジ穴や接着剤が塗布される凹部等を、本技術に係る目印の一実施形態として機能させることも可能となる。
 このように、表示モジュール9をユニット基板10に対して配置する場合に基準とする目印は限定されず、任意の部材や接着点等を目印とすることが可能である。また、位置決め部材に構成された目印を基準として、表示モジュール9を配置する方法も限定されず、任意の方法が採用されてよい。
The positioning member 11 and the display module 9 may be connected by fastening with a fastening member such as a screw, bonding with an adhesive, welding, or the like. Even in this case, the display module 9 and the positioning member 11 are integrally slidable with respect to the unit substrate 10. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the stress generated by the deformation of the unit substrate 10 from being applied to the plurality of display modules 9 and the positioning member 11.
For example, by appropriately designing the mounting position of the fastening member, the coating position of the adhesive, and the like, it is possible to connect the display module 9 to the positioning member 11 while positioning the display module 9 in the X and Y directions. Is. In this case, for example, a screw hole, a recess to which an adhesive is applied, or the like can be made to function as an embodiment of a mark according to the present technology.
As described above, when the display module 9 is arranged with respect to the unit substrate 10, the reference mark is not limited, and any member, an adhesive point, or the like can be used as a mark. Further, the method of arranging the display module 9 with reference to the mark configured on the positioning member is not limited, and any method may be adopted.
 [表示モジュール]
 図13を参照して、表示モジュール9の概要について説明する。
 図13では、表示モジュール9をY方向から見た場合の構成例が模式的に図示されている。
[Display module]
The outline of the display module 9 will be described with reference to FIG.
In FIG. 13, a configuration example when the display module 9 is viewed from the Y direction is schematically shown.
 表示モジュール9は、表示パネル12と、支持基板51と、調整機構52とを有する。
 表示パネル12は、表示面53と、その反対側の後方面54とを有する。
 支持基板51は、表示パネル12を支持する。支持基板51により、表示パネル12の後方面54が支持される。図12に示す例では、表示パネル12の後方面54に補強部材47が接続される。支持基板51は、補強部材47を介して表示パネル12を支持する。
 また図12に示す例では、支持基板51の後方面54に、当接基準面48を有する当接用凸部46が形成される。
 支持基板51は、例えばアルミニウム等の金属で形成される。その他、支持基板51の材料は限定されず、任意の材料が用いられてよい。
The display module 9 has a display panel 12, a support board 51, and an adjustment mechanism 52.
The display panel 12 has a display surface 53 and a rear surface 54 on the opposite side thereof.
The support substrate 51 supports the display panel 12. The support substrate 51 supports the rear surface 54 of the display panel 12. In the example shown in FIG. 12, the reinforcing member 47 is connected to the rear surface 54 of the display panel 12. The support substrate 51 supports the display panel 12 via the reinforcing member 47.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 12, a contact convex portion 46 having a contact reference surface 48 is formed on the rear surface 54 of the support substrate 51.
The support substrate 51 is made of a metal such as aluminum. In addition, the material of the support substrate 51 is not limited, and any material may be used.
 調整機構52は、表示パネル12及び支持基板51の各々に接続され、支持基板51に対する表示パネル12の相対的な距離を調整可能である。例えば、図12に示す例では、調整機構52により、支持基板51に形成される当接基準面48から、表示パネル12の表示面53までの距離を調整することが可能となる。
 上記したように、図12等に示す例では、支持基板51に形成された当接用凸部46の当接基準面48と、ユニット基板10に形成された支持凸部37の当接基準面34とが当接することで、ユニット基板10に対する表示モジュール9のZ方向における位置が規定される。
 本実施形態では、さらに、調整機構52により、支持基板51に対する表示パネル12のZ方向における位置を調整することが可能となる。この結果、表示パネル12の表示面53のZ方向における位置や傾き等を調整することが可能となる。
 これにより、図4に示すように、複数の表示パネル12が並べられる場合等において、各表示面53を同一面上にそろえることが可能となる。
The adjusting mechanism 52 is connected to each of the display panel 12 and the support board 51, and the relative distance of the display panel 12 to the support board 51 can be adjusted. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 12, the adjusting mechanism 52 makes it possible to adjust the distance from the contact reference surface 48 formed on the support substrate 51 to the display surface 53 of the display panel 12.
As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 12 and the like, the contact reference surface 48 of the contact convex portion 46 formed on the support substrate 51 and the contact reference surface of the support convex portion 37 formed on the unit substrate 10. The contact with 34 defines the position of the display module 9 with respect to the unit substrate 10 in the Z direction.
In the present embodiment, the adjustment mechanism 52 further makes it possible to adjust the position of the display panel 12 with respect to the support substrate 51 in the Z direction. As a result, it is possible to adjust the position, inclination, and the like of the display surface 53 of the display panel 12 in the Z direction.
As a result, as shown in FIG. 4, when a plurality of display panels 12 are arranged side by side, it is possible to align the display surfaces 53 on the same surface.
 [調整機構]
 図10~図12、及び図14~図16を参照して、調整機構52について説明する。
 図14は、表示モジュール9を前方側から見た場合の分解斜視図である。
 図15は、表示モジュール9の上辺を、調整機構52の中心を通るようにY方向に垂直な面(XZ平面)で切断した場合の断面図の一部である。図15は、表示モジュール9の左上の隅部の位置の近傍の断面図となる。
 図16は、表示モジュール9を後方側から見た場合の分解斜視図である。図16は、表示モジュール9の右上部に相当する部分の分解斜視図となる。
[Adjustment mechanism]
The adjusting mechanism 52 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12 and 14 to 16.
FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the display module 9 when viewed from the front side.
FIG. 15 is a part of a cross-sectional view when the upper side of the display module 9 is cut along a plane (XZ plane) perpendicular to the Y direction so as to pass through the center of the adjusting mechanism 52. FIG. 15 is a cross-sectional view near the position of the upper left corner of the display module 9.
FIG. 16 is an exploded perspective view of the display module 9 when viewed from the rear side. FIG. 16 is an exploded perspective view of a portion corresponding to the upper right portion of the display module 9.
 図14に示すように、表示面53に垂直な方向(Z方向)から見た場合に、表示パネル12及び支持基板51の各々の外形は、互いに略等しい矩形状となる。従って、表示パネル12の周縁部57は、支持基板51の周縁部58に支持される。
 本実施形態では、表示パネル12の周縁部57と、支持基板51の周縁部58との間に、14個の調整機構52が構成される。
As shown in FIG. 14, when viewed from the direction perpendicular to the display surface 53 (Z direction), the outer shapes of the display panel 12 and the support substrate 51 are rectangular shapes substantially equal to each other. Therefore, the peripheral edge portion 57 of the display panel 12 is supported by the peripheral edge portion 58 of the support substrate 51.
In the present embodiment, 14 adjusting mechanisms 52 are configured between the peripheral edge portion 57 of the display panel 12 and the peripheral edge portion 58 of the support substrate 51.
 図14~図15に示すように、支持基板51の周縁部58には、調整機構52を取付けるための取付機構59が構成される。
 取付機構59は、支持基板51を後方側から見た場合に、前方側に向けて凹形状となる取付凹部60を有する。後方側からZ方向に沿って取付凹部60を見た場合の外形は円形状である。
 取付凹部60は、凹部の底面となる平板部61と、平板部61から後方側に延在する側壁部62とを有する。平板部61は、表示面53と平行に配置される、平板形状の部材となる。
 また取付機構59の取付凹部60には、調整機構52を取付けるための調整機構用の貫通穴63が形成される。
As shown in FIGS. 14 to 15, a mounting mechanism 59 for mounting the adjusting mechanism 52 is configured on the peripheral edge portion 58 of the support substrate 51.
The mounting mechanism 59 has a mounting recess 60 having a concave shape toward the front side when the support board 51 is viewed from the rear side. When the mounting recess 60 is viewed from the rear side along the Z direction, the outer shape is circular.
The mounting recess 60 has a flat plate portion 61 that is the bottom surface of the recess, and a side wall portion 62 that extends rearward from the flat plate portion 61. The flat plate portion 61 is a flat plate-shaped member arranged in parallel with the display surface 53.
Further, in the mounting recess 60 of the mounting mechanism 59, a through hole 63 for the adjusting mechanism for mounting the adjusting mechanism 52 is formed.
 取付機構59は、以下の14箇所に形成される。
 周縁部58の4隅(4箇所)
 周縁部58の2つの短辺(上辺及び下辺)の、両端よりも中央側に2箇所(合計4箇所)
 周縁部58の2つの長辺(左辺及び右辺)の、両端から中央側に3箇所(合計6箇所)
 周縁部58の短辺及び長辺の各々に着目すると、取付機構59は、両端の間の1以上の位置に形成される。なお、短辺及び長辺の両端は、周縁部58の4隅の位置に対応する。
The mounting mechanism 59 is formed at the following 14 locations.
4 corners (4 locations) of peripheral edge 58
Two short sides (upper side and lower side) of the peripheral edge 58, two places on the center side of both ends (four places in total)
Two long sides (left side and right side) of the peripheral portion 58, three places from both ends to the center side (six places in total)
Focusing on each of the short side and the long side of the peripheral edge portion 58, the mounting mechanism 59 is formed at one or more positions between both ends. Both ends of the short side and the long side correspond to the positions of the four corners of the peripheral edge portion 58.
 図14に示すように、2つの短辺における中央側の2箇所の位置は、両端と中央との略中間の2つの位置になる。
 2つの長辺において、中央側の3箇所の位置は、中央の1つ位置と、両端と中央との略中間の2つの位置になる。
 表示モジュール9を正面から見て、調整機構用の貫通穴63の位置は、調整機構52の位置に相当する。1つの表示モジュール9に対して、調整機構52の位置及び数は限定されず、任意に設計されてよい。
As shown in FIG. 14, the two positions on the center side of the two short sides are two positions substantially in the middle between both ends and the center.
On the two long sides, the three positions on the center side are one position in the center and two positions approximately in the middle between both ends and the center.
When the display module 9 is viewed from the front, the position of the through hole 63 for the adjustment mechanism corresponds to the position of the adjustment mechanism 52. The position and number of adjustment mechanisms 52 are not limited to one display module 9, and may be arbitrarily designed.
 本実施形態では、調整機構52は、雄ネジスタッド66と、雌ネジ67と、ねじりコイルばね68と、蓋部材69と、蓋止めネジ70とを有する。
 雄ネジスタッド66は、頭部71と、ネジ山が形成されている雄ネジ部72とを有する。頭部71の中心に雄ネジ部72が連結される。
 雄ネジスタッド66の頭部71は、表示パネル12の後方側に接続される補強部材47に、雄ネジ部72が後方側に延在するように設置される。雄ネジスタッド66は、中心軸が、調整機構用の貫通穴63の中心に一致するように、補強部材47に接続される。
 雄ネジスタッド66の頭部71は、例えばネジ等の締結部材による締結により、補強部材47に固定される。その他、接着剤を用いた接着、溶着等、雄ネジスタッド66を補強部材47に対して固定可能な任意の固定方法が採用されてよい。
 雄ネジスタッド66は、例えば鉄等の金属材料で形成される。もちろん雄ネジスタッド66の材料は限定されず、任意の材料が用いられてよい。
 雄ネジスタッド66は、本技術に係る、表示パネルに取付けられネジと接続する接続部材の一実施形態に相当する。
In the present embodiment, the adjusting mechanism 52 has a male screw stud 66, a female screw 67, a torsion coil spring 68, a lid member 69, and a lid set screw 70.
The male screw stud 66 has a head 71 and a male screw portion 72 on which a thread is formed. The male screw portion 72 is connected to the center of the head 71.
The head 71 of the male screw stud 66 is installed on a reinforcing member 47 connected to the rear side of the display panel 12 so that the male screw portion 72 extends to the rear side. The male screw stud 66 is connected to the reinforcing member 47 so that the central axis coincides with the center of the through hole 63 for the adjusting mechanism.
The head 71 of the male screw stud 66 is fixed to the reinforcing member 47, for example, by fastening with a fastening member such as a screw. In addition, any fixing method capable of fixing the male screw stud 66 to the reinforcing member 47, such as adhesion using an adhesive or welding, may be adopted.
The male screw stud 66 is made of a metal material such as iron. Of course, the material of the male screw stud 66 is not limited, and any material may be used.
The male screw stud 66 corresponds to an embodiment of a connecting member attached to a display panel and connected to a screw according to the present technology.
 雌ネジ67は、頭部73と、中空状の円柱形状部74とを有する。円柱形状部74の中空部分は、雄ネジ部72と係合するネジ穴として構成される。また、頭部73の中心部分にも貫通穴75が形成されており、ネジ穴と連結している。
 雌ネジ67は、円柱形状部74が前方側に向けて延在するように、取付凹部60の内部に配置される。雌ネジ67は中心軸が、調整機構用の貫通穴63の中心に一致するように、すなわち雄ネジスタッド66の中心軸と一致するように配置される。
 本実施形態では、蓋部材69の前方側の面に雌ネジ67の頭部73が取付けられる。また、蓋部材69の後方側から回転用部材76が、蓋部材69を挟むようにして、雌ネジ67と接続される。図15に示す例では、雌ネジ67の頭部73の貫通穴75に、回転用部材76の前方側の端部が挿入され固定される。雌ネジ67及び回転用部材76は、蓋部材69に対して回転可能に構成される。
 例えば、回転用部材76の後方側の面には、ドライバと係合可能な溝(例えばプラス溝やマイナス溝)が形成される。ユーザは、ドライバ等を用いて回転用部材76を回転させることで、雌ネジ67を回転させることが可能となる。もちろん、雌ネジ67を回転させるための構成として、他の任意の構成が採用されてよい。
 なお、図16では、回転用部材76の図示は省略されている。
 雌ネジ67は、例えば鉄等の金属材料で形成される。もちろん雌ネジ67の材料は限定されず、任意の材料が用いられてよい。
 雌ネジ67は、本技術に係る、支持基板に取付けられるネジの一実施形態に相当する。
The female screw 67 has a head 73 and a hollow cylindrical portion 74. The hollow portion of the cylindrical portion 74 is configured as a screw hole that engages with the male screw portion 72. Further, a through hole 75 is also formed in the central portion of the head 73, and is connected to the screw hole.
The female screw 67 is arranged inside the mounting recess 60 so that the cylindrical portion 74 extends toward the front side. The female screw 67 is arranged so that the central axis coincides with the center of the through hole 63 for the adjusting mechanism, that is, coincides with the central axis of the male screw stud 66.
In the present embodiment, the head 73 of the female screw 67 is attached to the front surface of the lid member 69. Further, the rotating member 76 is connected to the female screw 67 from the rear side of the lid member 69 so as to sandwich the lid member 69. In the example shown in FIG. 15, the front end portion of the rotating member 76 is inserted and fixed into the through hole 75 of the head 73 of the female screw 67. The female screw 67 and the rotating member 76 are configured to be rotatable with respect to the lid member 69.
For example, a groove (for example, a plus groove or a minus groove) that can be engaged with a screwdriver is formed on the rear surface of the rotating member 76. The user can rotate the female screw 67 by rotating the rotating member 76 using a screwdriver or the like. Of course, any other configuration may be adopted as the configuration for rotating the female screw 67.
In addition, in FIG. 16, the illustration of the rotating member 76 is omitted.
The female screw 67 is made of a metal material such as iron. Of course, the material of the female screw 67 is not limited, and any material may be used.
The female screw 67 corresponds to an embodiment of a screw attached to a support substrate according to the present technology.
 蓋部材69は、前方側に取付けられる雌ネジ67が、取付凹部60の中心の位置に配置されるように、支持基板51に接続される。
 図14等に示す例では、蓋部材69は、取付凹部60の周辺の所定の2箇所にて、蓋止めネジ70により支持基板51に接続される。
 図15に示すように、支持基板51の4隅に構成される調整機構52の蓋部材69と、その隣の位置に構成される調整機構52の蓋部材69との、Z方向から見た場合の形状は互いに異なる。このように、各調整機構52にて、調整機構52を構成する各部材の形状等が異なっていてもよい。
 本実施形態では、蓋部材69は、図12等に示す磁性体部材44に相当する部材である。すなわち、本実施形態では、蓋部材69と、ユニット基板10に埋設される磁石33とが吸着される。このように、調整機構52を構成する部材を、表示ユニット5をユニット基板10へ接続するための部材として兼用させてもよい。これにより、部品数の低減、構成の簡素化を図ることが可能となる。
 蓋部材69は、例えば鉄等の金属材料で形成される。もちろん蓋部材69の材料は限定されず、任意の材料が用いられてよい。
 蓋部材69は、本技術に係る、ネジを回転可能に保持し、支持基板に固定される固定部材の一実施形態に相当する。雌ネジ67は、蓋部材69を介して、支持基板51に回転可能に取り付けられる。
The lid member 69 is connected to the support substrate 51 so that the female screw 67 to be mounted on the front side is arranged at the center of the mounting recess 60.
In the example shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the lid member 69 is connected to the support substrate 51 by the lid set screw 70 at two predetermined positions around the mounting recess 60.
As shown in FIG. 15, when the lid member 69 of the adjusting mechanism 52 configured at the four corners of the support substrate 51 and the lid member 69 of the adjusting mechanism 52 configured at a position adjacent to the lid member 69 are viewed from the Z direction. The shapes of are different from each other. As described above, each adjusting mechanism 52 may have a different shape or the like of each member constituting the adjusting mechanism 52.
In the present embodiment, the lid member 69 is a member corresponding to the magnetic material member 44 shown in FIG. 12 and the like. That is, in the present embodiment, the lid member 69 and the magnet 33 embedded in the unit substrate 10 are attracted to each other. In this way, the member constituting the adjusting mechanism 52 may also be used as a member for connecting the display unit 5 to the unit substrate 10. This makes it possible to reduce the number of parts and simplify the configuration.
The lid member 69 is made of a metal material such as iron. Of course, the material of the lid member 69 is not limited, and any material may be used.
The lid member 69 corresponds to an embodiment of a fixing member according to the present technology, which holds a screw rotatably and is fixed to a support substrate. The female screw 67 is rotatably attached to the support substrate 51 via the lid member 69.
 ねじりコイルばね68は、取付凹部60内にて、平板部61と蓋部材69との間に配置される。ねじりコイルばね68は、一方の端部が平板部61に接続され、もう一方の端部が雌ネジ67の頭部73に接続される。従って、ねじりコイルばね68により、雌ネジ67が蓋部材69の方向に付勢される。これにより、雄ネジ部72と雌ネジ67との間のガタ(バックラッシュ)を防止すること可能となる。
 ねじりコイルばね68の具体的な材料や形状は限定されない。ねじりコイルばね68は、本技術に係る、固定部材と平板部との間に配置されネジを固定部材の方向へ付勢する付勢部材の一実施形態に相当する。
 なお、雌ネジ67を蓋部材69の方向に付勢するための部材は、ねじりコイルばね68に限定されない。例えば、皿ばねやゴム等が用いられ、雌ネジ67が蓋部材69の方向に付勢されてもよい。その他、付勢のための方法は限定されず、任意の方法が採用されてよい。
The torsion coil spring 68 is arranged between the flat plate portion 61 and the lid member 69 in the mounting recess 60. One end of the torsion coil spring 68 is connected to the flat plate portion 61, and the other end is connected to the head 73 of the female screw 67. Therefore, the torsion coil spring 68 urges the female screw 67 toward the lid member 69. This makes it possible to prevent backlash between the male screw portion 72 and the female screw 67.
The specific material and shape of the torsion coil spring 68 are not limited. The torsion coil spring 68 corresponds to one embodiment of the urging member according to the present technology, which is arranged between the fixing member and the flat plate portion and urges the screw in the direction of the fixing member.
The member for urging the female screw 67 in the direction of the lid member 69 is not limited to the torsion coil spring 68. For example, a disc spring, rubber, or the like may be used, and the female screw 67 may be urged in the direction of the lid member 69. In addition, the method for encouraging is not limited, and any method may be adopted.
 図15等に示すように、雄ネジスタッド66と、雌ネジ67は、調整機構用の貫通穴63を介して互いに接続される。図15に示す例では、雄ネジスタッド66の雄ネジ部72が、貫通穴63を貫通して後方側に延在する。もちろんこれに限定されず、雌ネジ67の円柱形状部74が貫通穴63を貫通する構成でもよい。
 支持基板51に蓋部材69を取付ける際には、回転用部材76を適宜回転して、雄ネジスタッド66と雌ネジ67を嵌合させる。そして、蓋止めネジ70により、蓋部材69を支持基板51に固定する。
As shown in FIG. 15 and the like, the male screw stud 66 and the female screw 67 are connected to each other via a through hole 63 for an adjusting mechanism. In the example shown in FIG. 15, the male screw portion 72 of the male screw stud 66 penetrates the through hole 63 and extends to the rear side. Of course, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cylindrical portion 74 of the female screw 67 may be configured to penetrate the through hole 63.
When attaching the lid member 69 to the support substrate 51, the rotating member 76 is appropriately rotated to fit the male screw stud 66 and the female screw 67. Then, the lid member 69 is fixed to the support substrate 51 by the lid set screw 70.
 なお、図14等に示すように、支持基板51の周縁部には、位置決めピン45が貫通する位置決めピン用の貫通穴77が形成される。位置決めピン用の貫通穴77は、位置決めピン45が取付けられる位置に形成される。 As shown in FIG. 14 and the like, a through hole 77 for the positioning pin through which the positioning pin 45 penetrates is formed on the peripheral edge of the support substrate 51. The through hole 77 for the positioning pin is formed at a position where the positioning pin 45 is mounted.
 [調整機構による表示パネルの高さ調整]
 図15を参照して、調整機構52による表示パネル12の高さ調整について説明する。
 本実施形態では、調整機構52により、支持基板51に対する表示パネル12の、表示面に垂直な方向における相対的な距離が調整される。
 以降、支持基板51に対する表示パネル12の、表示面53に垂直な方向における相対的な距離の調整を、支持基板51に対する表示パネル12の高さの調整、又は単に表示パネル12の高さの調整と表現する場合がある。
[Adjusting the height of the display panel by the adjustment mechanism]
The height adjustment of the display panel 12 by the adjustment mechanism 52 will be described with reference to FIG.
In the present embodiment, the adjusting mechanism 52 adjusts the relative distance of the display panel 12 with respect to the support substrate 51 in the direction perpendicular to the display surface.
Hereinafter, the adjustment of the relative distance of the display panel 12 with respect to the support substrate 51 in the direction perpendicular to the display surface 53 is adjusted, the height of the display panel 12 with respect to the support substrate 51 is adjusted, or the height of the display panel 12 is simply adjusted. May be expressed as.
 本実施形態では、雄ネジスタッド66に対する雌ネジ67の相対的な回転により、表示パネル12の高さが調整される。
 例えば、ドライバ等の工具を使って、回転用部材76が回転される。回転用部材76と雌ネジ67とは接続されているため、回転用部材76が回転されると、雌ネジ67も一体となって回転する。
 雄ネジスタッド66は、回転しないように補強部材47に固定されている。従って、雌ネジ67が回転されることにより、雄ネジスタッド66と雌ネジ67との嵌合の位置(嵌合の深さ)が調整される。従って、雄ネジスタッド66の前方側の端部が、雌ネジ67に対して相対的に前方側、又は後方側に移動する。
 例えば、雌ネジ67が右回りに回転された場合に、雄ネジスタッド66が前方側に移動する。雌ネジ67が左回りに回転された場合に、雄ネジスタッド66が後方側に移動する。もちろん、雌ネジ67の回転方向と、雄ネジスタッド66のZ方向に沿った移動の向きとの関係が、逆の関係でもよい。
In this embodiment, the height of the display panel 12 is adjusted by the relative rotation of the female screw 67 with respect to the male screw stud 66.
For example, the rotating member 76 is rotated by using a tool such as a screwdriver. Since the rotating member 76 and the female screw 67 are connected to each other, when the rotating member 76 is rotated, the female screw 67 also rotates integrally.
The male screw stud 66 is fixed to the reinforcing member 47 so as not to rotate. Therefore, by rotating the female screw 67, the fitting position (fitting depth) between the male screw stud 66 and the female screw 67 is adjusted. Therefore, the front end portion of the male screw stud 66 moves to the front side or the rear side relative to the female screw 67.
For example, when the female screw 67 is rotated clockwise, the male screw stud 66 moves forward. When the female screw 67 is rotated counterclockwise, the male screw stud 66 moves to the rear side. Of course, the relationship between the rotation direction of the female screw 67 and the direction of movement of the male screw stud 66 along the Z direction may be opposite.
 雌ネジ67は蓋部材69を介して支持基板51に固定されている。また、雄ネジスタッド66は補強部材47に固定されている。従って、雄ネジスタッド66がZ方向に沿って前方側又は後方側に移動すると、支持基板51に対する表示パネル12の、表示面に垂直な方向における相対的な距離が調整される。
 本実施形態では、雌ネジ67を右回りに回転させることで、表示パネル12の表示面53を後方に移動させることが可能となる。雌ネジ67を左回りに回転させることで、表示パネル12の表示面53を前方側に移動させることが可能となる。
 すなわち本実施形態では、雌ネジ67が右回りに回転されることで、支持基板51に対する表示パネル12の高さを低くすることが可能である。また、雌ネジ67が反時計回りに回転されることで、支持基板51に対する表示パネル12の高さを高くすることが可能である。このように、雌ネジ67が回転されることにより、支持基板51に対する表示パネル12の高さが調整される。
The female screw 67 is fixed to the support substrate 51 via the lid member 69. Further, the male screw stud 66 is fixed to the reinforcing member 47. Therefore, when the male screw stud 66 moves forward or backward along the Z direction, the relative distance of the display panel 12 with respect to the support substrate 51 in the direction perpendicular to the display surface is adjusted.
In the present embodiment, the display surface 53 of the display panel 12 can be moved backward by rotating the female screw 67 clockwise. By rotating the female screw 67 counterclockwise, the display surface 53 of the display panel 12 can be moved to the front side.
That is, in the present embodiment, the height of the display panel 12 with respect to the support substrate 51 can be lowered by rotating the female screw 67 clockwise. Further, by rotating the female screw 67 counterclockwise, it is possible to increase the height of the display panel 12 with respect to the support substrate 51. By rotating the female screw 67 in this way, the height of the display panel 12 with respect to the support substrate 51 is adjusted.
 表示パネル12の高さの調整は、表示モジュール9をユニット基板10に取付ける前に、専用の治具等を用いて実行される。例えば、支持基板51を治具により固定し、各調整機構52の雌ネジ67を回転させる。もちろん、このような調整方法に限定される訳ではない。
 図14に示す例では、表示パネル12及び支持基板51の周縁部58に、14個の調整機構52が構成される。各調整機構52にて雌ネジ67を回転させることで、調整機構52が構成される位置における表示パネル12の高さが調整可能となる。
 例えば、図12等に示す当接用凸部46の当接基準面48から表示面53までの距離を、表示パネル12の高さとして規定する。また当該表示パネル12の高さに関して、設計値を定める。
 表示パネル12と支持基板51とを接続させた後に、14箇所の調整機構52を操作することで、表示面53の全体の領域にわたって、表示パネル12の高さを設計値に調整することが可能である。なお設計値は、所定の値に相当する。
The height adjustment of the display panel 12 is performed by using a dedicated jig or the like before mounting the display module 9 on the unit board 10. For example, the support substrate 51 is fixed by a jig, and the female screw 67 of each adjustment mechanism 52 is rotated. Of course, it is not limited to such an adjustment method.
In the example shown in FIG. 14, 14 adjusting mechanisms 52 are configured on the peripheral edge portion 58 of the display panel 12 and the support substrate 51. By rotating the female screw 67 in each adjustment mechanism 52, the height of the display panel 12 at the position where the adjustment mechanism 52 is configured can be adjusted.
For example, the distance from the contact reference surface 48 of the contact convex portion 46 shown in FIG. 12 or the like to the display surface 53 is defined as the height of the display panel 12. Further, a design value is determined for the height of the display panel 12.
After connecting the display panel 12 and the support board 51, the height of the display panel 12 can be adjusted to the design value over the entire area of the display surface 53 by operating the adjustment mechanisms 52 at 14 locations. Is. The design value corresponds to a predetermined value.
 本実施形態では、1つのユニット基板10に対して8つの表示モジュール9が配置される。
 表示ユニット5を組み立てる場合には、予め複数の表示モジュール9の各々にて、調整機構52を操作することで、表示パネル12の高さが設計値に調整される。すなわち、表示モジュール9をユニット基板10に取付ける前に、各表示モジュール9の表示パネル12の高さが、同じ高さに調整される。
In this embodiment, eight display modules 9 are arranged for one unit board 10.
When assembling the display unit 5, the height of the display panel 12 is adjusted to the design value by operating the adjustment mechanism 52 in each of the plurality of display modules 9 in advance. That is, before mounting the display module 9 on the unit board 10, the height of the display panel 12 of each display module 9 is adjusted to the same height.
 表示パネル12の高さがそろえられた複数の表示モジュール9が、位置決め部材11を基準として、ユニット基板10に接続される。表示モジュール9内の当接基準面48と、ユニット基板10の当接基準面34とが当接し、ユニット基板10に対する表示モジュール9のZ方向の位置が規定される。
 各表示モジュール9にて、表示パネル12の高さがそろえられているので、8つの表示モジュール9の表示面53は、同一面上に配置される。これにより、高品質な画像を表示することが可能となる。
A plurality of display modules 9 having the same height of the display panel 12 are connected to the unit board 10 with the positioning member 11 as a reference. The contact reference surface 48 in the display module 9 and the contact reference surface 34 of the unit substrate 10 are in contact with each other, and the position of the display module 9 with respect to the unit substrate 10 in the Z direction is defined.
Since the heights of the display panels 12 are aligned in each display module 9, the display surfaces 53 of the eight display modules 9 are arranged on the same surface. This makes it possible to display a high-quality image.
 例えば、各表示モジュール9の表示パネル12の高さに差異があり、表示面53が同一面上に配置されないとする。この場合、表示装置100により表示される画像をユーザが視聴した時に、隣接する表示面53同士の段差等により、輝線や暗線が認識される場合がある。
 例えば、左右に並ぶ2枚の表示パネル12のうち右側の表示面53が左側の表示面53よりも前方側に位置していたとする。ユーザが、この表示装置100を右前方から見た場合に、左側の表示パネル12の右端の部分は、右側の表示パネル12の左端の部分に遮られる状態となる。これにより、左右の表示パネル12の継ぎ目の部分に、暗線が発生して見てしまう。
 輝線についても、隣接する表示面53同士の段差に起因して発生する。
For example, it is assumed that the heights of the display panels 12 of the display modules 9 are different and the display surfaces 53 are not arranged on the same surface. In this case, when the user views the image displayed by the display device 100, a bright line or a dark line may be recognized due to a step between adjacent display surfaces 53 or the like.
For example, it is assumed that the display surface 53 on the right side of the two display panels 12 arranged side by side is located on the front side of the display surface 53 on the left side. When the user views the display device 100 from the front right, the right end portion of the left display panel 12 is blocked by the left end portion of the right display panel 12. As a result, dark lines are generated at the joints of the left and right display panels 12 and are seen.
The emission line is also generated due to the step between the adjacent display surfaces 53.
 本技術に係る表示装置100では、調整機構52を操作することで、複数の表示面53を同一面上に配置することが容易に実現される。これにより、輝線や暗線の発生を十分に抑制することが可能となり、高品質な画像を表示することが可能となる。 In the display device 100 according to the present technology, it is easily realized that a plurality of display surfaces 53 are arranged on the same surface by operating the adjustment mechanism 52. As a result, it is possible to sufficiently suppress the generation of bright lines and dark lines, and it is possible to display a high-quality image.
 また、本実施形態のように、調整機構52を、複数の位置にそれぞれ構成することにより、例えば、表示パネル12の平面度の悪化を抑制することが可能である。
 本実施形態では、補強部材47が、表示パネル12に対して例えば接着剤により接着される。接着剤の硬化及び収縮により、表示パネル12に対して応力が発生し、表示パネル12に歪みが発生し、平面度が悪化する場合があり得る。
 すなわち、1枚の表示パネル12をX方向又はY方向から見た場合に、表示パネル12はZ方向に高さの差異を持ち、波打って見えるような場合もあり得る。
 調整機構52を、各辺において複数構成することにより、このような高さの差異を十分に抑制することが可能となり、表示パネル12の平面度の悪化を十分に抑制することが可能となる。
 調整機構52の数を多くし、調整機構52が配置される間隔を小さくする。これにより、表示パネル12の高さを非常に高い精度で調整することが可能となり、良好な平面度を容易に実現することが可能となる。この結果、高品質な画像の表示が可能となる。
 一方で、調整機構52の数を少なくすることで、表示モジュール9の構成の簡素化、部品数の低減、部品コストの削減等を図ることが可能となる。例えば、このようなトレードオフとなる事項に基づいて、調整機構52の数が適宜設定されてよい。
Further, by configuring the adjusting mechanism 52 at a plurality of positions as in the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the flatness of the display panel 12, for example.
In this embodiment, the reinforcing member 47 is adhered to the display panel 12 with, for example, an adhesive. Due to the curing and shrinkage of the adhesive, stress may be generated on the display panel 12, the display panel 12 may be distorted, and the flatness may be deteriorated.
That is, when one display panel 12 is viewed from the X direction or the Y direction, the display panel 12 may have a difference in height in the Z direction and may appear wavy.
By configuring a plurality of adjusting mechanisms 52 on each side, it is possible to sufficiently suppress such a difference in height, and it is possible to sufficiently suppress deterioration of the flatness of the display panel 12.
The number of adjusting mechanisms 52 is increased, and the interval at which the adjusting mechanisms 52 are arranged is reduced. As a result, the height of the display panel 12 can be adjusted with extremely high accuracy, and good flatness can be easily realized. As a result, it is possible to display a high-quality image.
On the other hand, by reducing the number of adjustment mechanisms 52, it is possible to simplify the configuration of the display module 9, reduce the number of parts, reduce the cost of parts, and the like. For example, the number of adjusting mechanisms 52 may be appropriately set based on such trade-off matters.
 以降、表示パネル12の各々の周縁を、表示パネル12の稜線と表現することがある。
 本実施形態では、表示パネル12が、薄膜トランジスタ等の半導体プロセスが施されたガラス基材のように、稜線真直度精度の低い材料で形成される。すなわち、応力が加わることにより、表示パネル12の辺の真っ直ぐさが変化しやすい。
 このような稜線真直度精度の低い材料で表示パネル12が形成される場合でも、調整機構52が複数配置されることにより、表示パネル12の平面度を高く維持することが可能となる。これにより、表示パネル12に対して半導体プロセスによる回路形成を行うことが可能となり、製造コストを低減することが可能となる。
 また、例えば表示パネル12に、コンポジット材のような、稜線真直度精度が低く、温度変化や湿度変化により伸縮しやすい材料が用いられる場合でも、表示パネル12の平面度の悪化が抑制され、高品質な画像が表示可能となる。
Hereinafter, each peripheral edge of the display panel 12 may be referred to as a ridgeline of the display panel 12.
In the present embodiment, the display panel 12 is formed of a material having low ridge line straightness accuracy, such as a glass substrate subjected to a semiconductor process such as a thin film transistor. That is, the straightness of the side of the display panel 12 tends to change due to the application of stress.
Even when the display panel 12 is formed of a material having a low ridgeline straightness accuracy, the flatness of the display panel 12 can be maintained high by arranging a plurality of adjustment mechanisms 52. This makes it possible to form a circuit for the display panel 12 by a semiconductor process, and it is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost.
Further, even when a material such as a composite material having low ridgeline straightness accuracy and easily expanding and contracting due to temperature change and humidity change is used for the display panel 12, deterioration of the flatness of the display panel 12 is suppressed and high. High quality images can be displayed.
 また、本技術に係る表示装置100では、調整機構52によりあらかじめ各々の表示パネル12の高さが調整され、調整の後で表示モジュール9がユニット基板10に取り付けられる方法により、表示ユニット5が組み立てられる。
 また、複数の表示ユニット5を接続する場合に、各々の表示ユニット5の四隅の高さを揃えることで、全ての表示パネル12の高さを揃えることが可能である。
 これにより、少ない時間で表示ユニット5を組み立てることが可能である。また、作業時間が短縮されるため、設置に係る人件費等の、設置コストを削減することが可能である。
Further, in the display device 100 according to the present technology, the height of each display panel 12 is adjusted in advance by the adjustment mechanism 52, and the display unit 5 is assembled by a method in which the display module 9 is attached to the unit board 10 after the adjustment. Be done.
Further, when connecting a plurality of display units 5, the heights of all the display panels 12 can be made uniform by aligning the heights of the four corners of each display unit 5.
This makes it possible to assemble the display unit 5 in a short time. In addition, since the work time is shortened, it is possible to reduce the installation cost such as the labor cost related to the installation.
 例えば、表示ユニット5に対して表示モジュール9を取り付ける際に、各表示パネル12の高さをそろえる方法が用いられるとする。この方法では、例えば表示モジュール9に不具合が発生し、代わりの表示モジュール9を取付ける場合に、その都度、表示パネル12の高さを調整する必要がある。
 本技術に係る表示装置では、表示モジュール9を取付ける際に、表示パネル12の高さを調整する必要がない。これにより、不良発生時の作業時間が短縮され、表示装置100が稼働できない時間を短縮できる。また、表示モジュール9の交換に係る人件費等の、サービスコストを低減することが可能である。
For example, when the display module 9 is attached to the display unit 5, a method of aligning the heights of the display panels 12 is used. In this method, for example, when a problem occurs in the display module 9 and a substitute display module 9 is installed, it is necessary to adjust the height of the display panel 12 each time.
In the display device according to the present technology, it is not necessary to adjust the height of the display panel 12 when the display module 9 is attached. As a result, the working time when a defect occurs can be shortened, and the time during which the display device 100 cannot operate can be shortened. Further, it is possible to reduce service costs such as labor costs related to the replacement of the display module 9.
 表示モジュール9の表示パネル12に対して、温度や湿度の変化により応力が発生する場合があり得る。当該応力により、表示パネル12が変形すると、高品質な画像を表示することが難しくなる。
 本実施形態では、調整機構52に含まれる雄ネジスタッド66と雌ネジ67との嵌合により、表示パネル12が支持基板51に十分に固定される。これにより、表示パネル12の変形を防止することが可能となる。
 このように、雄ネジスタッド66と雌ネジ67とを用いた調整機構52を用いることにより、表示パネル12の変形を抑制することが可能となる。
 その他、各々の表示パネル12の傾きや歪み、X方向又はY方向の位置のずれ等、種々の変形が抑制される。これにより、表示装置100が表示する画像の画質の均一性が向上し、高品質な画像表示が実現される。
Stress may be generated on the display panel 12 of the display module 9 due to changes in temperature and humidity. When the display panel 12 is deformed due to the stress, it becomes difficult to display a high-quality image.
In the present embodiment, the display panel 12 is sufficiently fixed to the support substrate 51 by fitting the male screw stud 66 and the female screw 67 included in the adjusting mechanism 52. This makes it possible to prevent the display panel 12 from being deformed.
As described above, by using the adjusting mechanism 52 using the male screw stud 66 and the female screw 67, it is possible to suppress the deformation of the display panel 12.
In addition, various deformations such as tilt and distortion of each display panel 12 and displacement of the position in the X direction or the Y direction are suppressed. As a result, the uniformity of the image quality of the image displayed by the display device 100 is improved, and high-quality image display is realized.
 本実施形態では、図15に示すように、雌ネジ67及び雄ネジスタッド66は、調整機構用の貫通穴63を介して互いに接続される。すなわち、雄ネジスタッド66の雄ネジ部72が調整機構用の貫通穴63を貫通し、雌ネジ67と嵌合する。
 調整機構用の貫通穴63の径は、雌ネジ67及び雄ネジスタッド66と接触しないサイズに設定される。従って、貫通穴63は、調整機構52と支持基板51との間に隙間を有するように構成され、調整機構52と支持基板51とが接触せずに調整機構52が貫通される。すなわち、雌ネジ67及び雄ネジスタッド66は、支持基板51から離間して構成される。
 これにより、支持基板51が変形した場合に、貫通穴63が調整機構52に接触し、表示パネル12に応力が伝わってしまうことが防止されている。
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the female screw 67 and the male screw stud 66 are connected to each other via a through hole 63 for an adjusting mechanism. That is, the male screw portion 72 of the male screw stud 66 penetrates the through hole 63 for the adjustment mechanism and fits with the female screw 67.
The diameter of the through hole 63 for the adjusting mechanism is set to a size that does not come into contact with the female screw 67 and the male screw stud 66. Therefore, the through hole 63 is configured to have a gap between the adjusting mechanism 52 and the support substrate 51, and the adjusting mechanism 52 is penetrated without contacting the adjusting mechanism 52 and the support substrate 51. That is, the female screw 67 and the male screw stud 66 are configured apart from the support substrate 51.
This prevents the through hole 63 from coming into contact with the adjusting mechanism 52 and transmitting stress to the display panel 12 when the support substrate 51 is deformed.
 表示パネル12は、例えばガラスにより生成される。また支持基板51は、例えばアルミニウムで形成される。アルミニウムの熱膨張率は、ガラスの熱膨張率に比べて極めて高いため、例えば表示装置100の温度が上昇した場合、支持基板51は表示パネル12に対して相対的に大きく膨張する。
 例えば、調整機構52と支持基板51との間に隙間が設けられない場合には、支持基板51の膨張に伴い、表示パネル12に応力が伝わってしまう。この結果、表示パネル12が変形してしまう可能性がある。
The display panel 12 is made of, for example, glass. The support substrate 51 is made of, for example, aluminum. Since the coefficient of thermal expansion of aluminum is extremely higher than the coefficient of thermal expansion of glass, for example, when the temperature of the display device 100 rises, the support substrate 51 expands relatively large with respect to the display panel 12.
For example, if a gap is not provided between the adjusting mechanism 52 and the support substrate 51, stress is transmitted to the display panel 12 as the support substrate 51 expands. As a result, the display panel 12 may be deformed.
 本実施形態では、雄ネジスタッド66と支持基板51との間に隙間があるため、雄ネジスタッド66と支持基板51とが接触することはない。従って、支持基板51が雄ネジスタッド66に応力を与えることはない。これにより、表示パネル12等の変形が抑制され、高品質な画像を表示することが可能となる。
 なお、調整機構用の貫通穴63の径は、支持基板51の膨張により支持基板51と雄ネジスタッド66とが接触しないよう、十分大きく設定される。具体的には、例えば支持基板51の熱膨張率や、支持基板の温度の取りうる範囲等を考慮し、支持基板51がどの程度膨張しうるかが計算され、径の大きさが設定される。もちろん、貫通穴63の径は任意の方法により設定されてよい。
In the present embodiment, since there is a gap between the male screw stud 66 and the support substrate 51, the male screw stud 66 and the support substrate 51 do not come into contact with each other. Therefore, the support substrate 51 does not give stress to the male screw stud 66. As a result, deformation of the display panel 12 and the like is suppressed, and a high-quality image can be displayed.
The diameter of the through hole 63 for the adjustment mechanism is set sufficiently large so that the support substrate 51 and the male screw stud 66 do not come into contact with each other due to the expansion of the support substrate 51. Specifically, for example, in consideration of the coefficient of thermal expansion of the support substrate 51, the range in which the temperature of the support substrate can be taken, and the like, how much the support substrate 51 can expand is calculated, and the size of the diameter is set. Of course, the diameter of the through hole 63 may be set by any method.
 また、本実施形態では、図10及び図11に示すように、位置決めピン45は位置決めピン貫通穴79を貫通し、位置決め部材11に構成される位置決め穴40と嵌合する。
 位置決めピン貫通穴79は、位置決めピン45と支持基板51との間に隙間を有するように構成される。これにより、支持基板51が変形した場合等において、位置決めピン貫通穴79が位置決めピン45に接触することが防止されている。
 この結果、支持基板51が変形した場合等において、表示パネル12に応力が伝わることが防止されている。これにより、表示パネル12等の変形が抑制され、高品質な画像を表示することが可能となる。
 なお、位置決めピン貫通穴79の径は、支持基板51の膨張により支持基板51と位置決めピン45とが接触しないよう、十分大きく設定される。
Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the positioning pin 45 penetrates the positioning pin through hole 79 and fits into the positioning hole 40 configured in the positioning member 11.
The positioning pin through hole 79 is configured to have a gap between the positioning pin 45 and the support substrate 51. This prevents the positioning pin through hole 79 from coming into contact with the positioning pin 45 when the support substrate 51 is deformed or the like.
As a result, when the support substrate 51 is deformed or the like, stress is prevented from being transmitted to the display panel 12. As a result, deformation of the display panel 12 and the like is suppressed, and a high-quality image can be displayed.
The diameter of the positioning pin through hole 79 is set sufficiently large so that the support substrate 51 and the positioning pin 45 do not come into contact with each other due to the expansion of the support substrate 51.
 図17及び図18は、調整機構52の他の構成例を示す断面図である。
 図17に示す調整機構52では、表示パネル12側の補強部材47に雌ネジ67が固定され、蓋部材69に雄ネジスタッド66が回転可能に接続される。
 雌ネジ67の頭部73が、表示パネル12に接続される補強部材47に固定される。雌ネジ67は、ネジ穴を有する円柱形状部74が、後方側に延在するように設けられる。
 蓋部材69の前方側の面には、雄ネジスタッド66の頭部71が接続される。雄ネジスタッド66は、雄ネジ部72が前方側に延在するように設けられる。
 雄ネジスタッド66の頭部71の中心には、取付穴が形成される。蓋部材69の後方側から回転用部材76が配置され、雄ネジスタッド66の頭部71の取付穴に固定される。これにより、雄ネジスタッド66と回転用部材76とが、一体的に回転可能となる。
 支持基板51の取付凹部60の平板部61と、雄ネジスタッド66の頭部71との間には、ねじりコイルばね68が設けられる。ねじりコイルばね68により、雄ネジスタッド66が、蓋部材69の方向へ付勢される。
 ユーザは、ドライバ等を用いて、回転用部材76を回転させる。これにより、雌ネジ67のZ方向における位置を調整することが可能となる。この結果、表示パネル12の高さを調整することが可能となる。
 図17に示すように、平板部61の貫通穴63は、雌ネジ67との間に隙間があくように、サイズが設計されている。これにより、支持基板51の変形等により、表示パネル12に応力が伝わるのを防止することが可能となる。
 図17に示す調整機構52において、雄ネジスタッド66は、支持基板に回転可能に取り付けられるネジの一実施形態に相当する。また、雌ネジ67は、表示パネルに取付けられネジと接続する接続部材の一実施形態に相当する。
17 and 18 are cross-sectional views showing another configuration example of the adjusting mechanism 52.
In the adjustment mechanism 52 shown in FIG. 17, the female screw 67 is fixed to the reinforcing member 47 on the display panel 12 side, and the male screw stud 66 is rotatably connected to the lid member 69.
The head 73 of the female screw 67 is fixed to the reinforcing member 47 connected to the display panel 12. The female screw 67 is provided so that the cylindrical portion 74 having a screw hole extends to the rear side.
The head 71 of the male screw stud 66 is connected to the front surface of the lid member 69. The male screw stud 66 is provided so that the male screw portion 72 extends to the front side.
A mounting hole is formed in the center of the head 71 of the male screw stud 66. The rotation member 76 is arranged from the rear side of the lid member 69 and is fixed to the mounting hole of the head 71 of the male screw stud 66. As a result, the male screw stud 66 and the rotating member 76 can be integrally rotated.
A torsion coil spring 68 is provided between the flat plate portion 61 of the mounting recess 60 of the support substrate 51 and the head 71 of the male screw stud 66. The torsion coil spring 68 urges the male screw stud 66 toward the lid member 69.
The user rotates the rotating member 76 by using a driver or the like. This makes it possible to adjust the position of the female screw 67 in the Z direction. As a result, the height of the display panel 12 can be adjusted.
As shown in FIG. 17, the size of the through hole 63 of the flat plate portion 61 is designed so that there is a gap between the flat plate portion 61 and the female screw 67. This makes it possible to prevent stress from being transmitted to the display panel 12 due to deformation of the support substrate 51 or the like.
In the adjusting mechanism 52 shown in FIG. 17, the male screw stud 66 corresponds to an embodiment of a screw rotatably attached to a support substrate. Further, the female screw 67 corresponds to an embodiment of a connecting member attached to the display panel and connected to the screw.
 図18に示す調整機構52では、表示パネル12側の補強部材47に、磁石82が固定される。また、蓋部材69には、雄ネジスタッド66が回転可能に接続される。
 蓋部材69の前方側の面には、雄ネジスタッド66の頭部71が接続される。雄ネジスタッド66は、雄ネジ部72が前方側に延在するように設けられる。
 雄ネジスタッド66は、蓋部材69を挟むようにして、回転用部材76と接続される。これにより、雄ネジスタッド66と回転用部材76とが、蓋部材69に対して一体的に回転可能となる。
 雄ネジスタッド66は、少なくとも先端部が磁性体からなる雄ネジ部72を有する。磁石82と、雄ネジ部72の先端部とを当接させると、両者は磁力により吸着する。
 例えば、雄ネジ部72の先端部は、コバルト、ニッケル等の磁性体材料により構成される。雄ネジ部72の全体、あるいは雄ネジスタッド66の全体が、磁性体材料により構成されてもよい。
In the adjustment mechanism 52 shown in FIG. 18, the magnet 82 is fixed to the reinforcing member 47 on the display panel 12 side. Further, a male screw stud 66 is rotatably connected to the lid member 69.
The head 71 of the male screw stud 66 is connected to the front surface of the lid member 69. The male screw stud 66 is provided so that the male screw portion 72 extends to the front side.
The male screw stud 66 is connected to the rotating member 76 so as to sandwich the lid member 69. As a result, the male screw stud 66 and the rotating member 76 can rotate integrally with the lid member 69.
The male screw stud 66 has a male screw portion 72 whose tip portion is at least made of a magnetic material. When the magnet 82 and the tip of the male screw portion 72 are brought into contact with each other, both are attracted by magnetic force.
For example, the tip of the male screw portion 72 is made of a magnetic material such as cobalt or nickel. The entire male screw portion 72 or the entire male screw stud 66 may be made of a magnetic material.
 支持基板51の取付凹部60の平板部61には、雄ネジスタッド66の雄ネジ部72が嵌合するネジ穴が形成される。回転用部材76を回転させることで、雄ネジ部72の先端部がZ方向に沿って移動可能となる。すなわち雄ネジ部72は、回転することで先端部が移動可能に、支持基板51に接続される。
 支持基板51の取付凹部60の平板部61と、雄ネジスタッド66の頭部71との間には、ねじりコイルばね68が設けられる。ねじりコイルばね68により、雄ネジスタッド66が、蓋部材69の方向へ付勢される。これにより、ネジ穴と雄ネジ部72との間のガタ(バックラッシュ)を防止すること可能となる。
 ユーザは、ドライバ等を用いて、回転用部材76を回転させる。これにより、雄ネジ部72の先端部、及び先端部に調節される磁石82のZ方向における位置を調整することが可能となる。この結果、表示パネル12の高さを調整することが可能となる。
 例えば、温度変化等により、支持基板51が変形したとする。この場合、平板部61のネジ穴から雄ネジ部72に、応力が伝わる場合があり得る。一方で、雄ネジ部72の先端部と、磁石82とが、磁力により吸着されている。すなわち雄ネジ部72の先端部と、磁石82とは、摺動可能に接続される。
 従って、各調整機構52において、支持基板51の変形等に応じて、磁石82が固定された補強部材47及び表示パネル12には、一体的にスライドすることが可能である。これにより、表示パネル12に応力が伝わるのを防止することが可能となる。
 図18に示す調整機構52において、雄ネジスタッド66は、少なくとも先端部が磁性体からなり、回転することで先端部が移動可能に支持基板に取付けられるネジの一実施形態に相当する。また、磁石82は、表示パネルに取付けられネジと接続する接続部材の一実施形態に相当する。
A screw hole into which the male screw portion 72 of the male screw stud 66 is fitted is formed in the flat plate portion 61 of the mounting recess 60 of the support substrate 51. By rotating the rotating member 76, the tip of the male screw portion 72 can move along the Z direction. That is, the male screw portion 72 is connected to the support substrate 51 so that the tip portion can be moved by rotating.
A torsion coil spring 68 is provided between the flat plate portion 61 of the mounting recess 60 of the support substrate 51 and the head 71 of the male screw stud 66. The torsion coil spring 68 urges the male screw stud 66 toward the lid member 69. This makes it possible to prevent backlash between the screw hole and the male screw portion 72.
The user rotates the rotating member 76 by using a driver or the like. This makes it possible to adjust the position of the tip of the male screw portion 72 and the magnet 82 adjusted to the tip in the Z direction. As a result, the height of the display panel 12 can be adjusted.
For example, it is assumed that the support substrate 51 is deformed due to a temperature change or the like. In this case, stress may be transmitted from the screw hole of the flat plate portion 61 to the male screw portion 72. On the other hand, the tip of the male screw portion 72 and the magnet 82 are attracted by a magnetic force. That is, the tip of the male screw portion 72 and the magnet 82 are slidably connected.
Therefore, in each adjusting mechanism 52, it is possible to slide integrally with the reinforcing member 47 and the display panel 12 to which the magnet 82 is fixed according to the deformation of the support substrate 51 or the like. This makes it possible to prevent stress from being transmitted to the display panel 12.
In the adjustment mechanism 52 shown in FIG. 18, the male screw stud 66 corresponds to an embodiment of a screw whose tip portion is made of a magnetic material and whose tip portion is movably attached to a support substrate by rotation. Further, the magnet 82 corresponds to an embodiment of a connecting member attached to a display panel and connected to a screw.
 [当接基準面の配置]
 図19は、ユニット基板10を前方側から見た場合の斜視図である。
 図19に示すように、ユニット基板10には、表示パネル12の4隅に対応する位置に、当接基準面34を有する支持凸部37が構成される。従って、ユニット基板10側の当接基準面34は、表示パネル12の4隅に対応する位置に構成される。
 支持基板51には、表示パネル12の4隅に対応する位置(すなわち支持基板51の4隅の位置)に、当接基準面48を有する当接用凸部46が構成される。従って、表示モジュール9側の当接基準面48は、表示パネル12の4隅に構成される。
 ユニット基板10側の当接基準面34と、表示モジュール9側の当接基準面48とが当接することで、ユニット基板10に対する各表示モジュール9の、Z方向における位置が規定される。
 ここで、当接基準面34及び当接基準面48が当接した状態の支持凸部37及び当接用凸部46全体を、Z位置決め機構85とする。また支持凸部37及び当接用凸部46のZ方向におけるサイズ(高さ)の和、すなわちZ位置決め機構85の高さを、基準高さとする。
 各表示モジュール9は、Z位置決め機構85により、ユニット基板10に対するZ方向における位置が規定される。またZ位置決め機構85の高さ、すなわち基準高さが、ユニット基板10に対する高さとなる。
[Arrangement of contact reference surface]
FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the unit substrate 10 when viewed from the front side.
As shown in FIG. 19, the unit substrate 10 is configured with a support convex portion 37 having a contact reference surface 34 at positions corresponding to the four corners of the display panel 12. Therefore, the contact reference surface 34 on the unit substrate 10 side is configured at positions corresponding to the four corners of the display panel 12.
The support board 51 is configured with a contact convex portion 46 having a contact reference surface 48 at positions corresponding to the four corners of the display panel 12 (that is, the positions of the four corners of the support board 51). Therefore, the contact reference surface 48 on the display module 9 side is configured at the four corners of the display panel 12.
The contact reference surface 34 on the unit board 10 side and the contact reference surface 48 on the display module 9 side come into contact with each other to define the position of each display module 9 with respect to the unit board 10 in the Z direction.
Here, the entire support convex portion 37 and the contact convex portion 46 in a state where the contact reference surface 34 and the contact reference surface 48 are in contact with each other are referred to as a Z positioning mechanism 85. Further, the sum of the sizes (heights) of the support convex portion 37 and the contact convex portion 46 in the Z direction, that is, the height of the Z positioning mechanism 85 is defined as the reference height.
The position of each display module 9 in the Z direction with respect to the unit substrate 10 is defined by the Z positioning mechanism 85. Further, the height of the Z positioning mechanism 85, that is, the reference height is the height with respect to the unit substrate 10.
 図20は、各表示モジュール9に対する、Z位置決め機構85の位置について説明するための模式図である。
 上記した通り、支持凸部37及び当接用凸部46の各々の高さを、機械加工により精密に加工する。これにより、Z位置決め機構85の基準高さを、精密に加工することが可能となる。
 一方で、表示パネル12に対して、複数のZ位置決め機構85を構成する際に、各Z位置決め機構85の基準高さに、公差αが生じる場合もあり得る。
FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram for explaining the position of the Z positioning mechanism 85 with respect to each display module 9.
As described above, the heights of the support convex portion 37 and the contact convex portion 46 are precisely machined. This makes it possible to precisely process the reference height of the Z positioning mechanism 85.
On the other hand, when a plurality of Z positioning mechanisms 85 are configured with respect to the display panel 12, a tolerance α may occur at the reference height of each Z positioning mechanism 85.
 例えば、図20に示すように、2つのZ位置決め機構85が構成されたとする。また、2つのZ位置決め機構85の間の距離をL1とする。
 この場合、公差αにより発生する表示モジュール9の傾きθは、以下の式で表される。
 tanθ=α/L1・・・(1)
For example, as shown in FIG. 20, it is assumed that two Z positioning mechanisms 85 are configured. Further, the distance between the two Z positioning mechanisms 85 is L1.
In this case, the inclination θ of the display module 9 generated by the tolerance α is expressed by the following equation.
tan θ = α / L1 ... (1)
 また、Z位置決め機構85の近傍となる表示モジュール9の端部の、Z位置決め機構85による支持位置の変動量(Z位置決め機構85の元の支持位置からの変動量)Δhは、以下の式で表される。なお、L2は、Z位置決め機構85から端部までの距離である。
 Δh=L2tanθ・・・(2)
 なお、図では、距離L1及びL2は、Z位置決め機構85のXY平面上における中心位置を基準として規定している。
Further, the amount of change in the support position by the Z-positioning mechanism 85 (the amount of change from the original support position of the Z-positioning mechanism 85) Δh at the end of the display module 9 in the vicinity of the Z-positioning mechanism 85 is given by the following equation. expressed. L2 is the distance from the Z positioning mechanism 85 to the end.
Δh = L2tanθ ... (2)
In the figure, the distances L1 and L2 are defined with reference to the center position of the Z positioning mechanism 85 on the XY plane.
 (2)式に(1)式のtanθを代入すると以下の式となる。
 Δh=α・L2/L1・・・(3)
 従って、公差αによる、表示モジュール9の端部のZ方向における位置の変動を抑制するためには、L1を大きくし、L2を小さくすることが有効であることがわかる。
Substituting tan θ of equation (1) into equation (2) yields the following equation.
Δh = α · L2 / L1 ... (3)
Therefore, it can be seen that it is effective to increase L1 and decrease L2 in order to suppress the fluctuation of the position of the end portion of the display module 9 in the Z direction due to the tolerance α.
 この点を考慮して、Z位置決め機構85を表示パネル12の周縁部58の位置に構成することで、公差αによる表示面53のZ方向の位置の変動を抑制することが可能となる。すなわち当接用凸部46を支持基板51の周縁部57に構成することで、表示面53のZ方向による位置の変動を抑制することが可能となる。 In consideration of this point, by configuring the Z positioning mechanism 85 at the position of the peripheral edge portion 58 of the display panel 12, it is possible to suppress the fluctuation of the position of the display surface 53 in the Z direction due to the tolerance α. That is, by forming the abutting convex portion 46 on the peripheral edge portion 57 of the support substrate 51, it is possible to suppress the fluctuation of the position of the display surface 53 in the Z direction.
 本実施形態では、支持基板51の4隅に、当接用凸部46が構成される。これにより、公差αによる表示面53のZ方向の位置の変動が十分に抑制されている。また、表示モジュール9の4隅の位置によりZ位置決め機構85が構成されるので、表示モジュール9を安定して支持することが可能となる。
 複数の表示モジュール9の各々は、互いに等しい構成を有する。従って、各表示モジュール9に対して、4隅の位置にZ位置決め機構85(当接用凸部46及び支持凸部37)が構成される。従って、支持凸部37は、隣接する表示モジュール9用の支持凸部37に対して、互いに近接して設けられることになる。このことは、表示モジュール9側の当接用凸部46が、隣接する表示モジュール9の当接用凸部46に対して、近接して設けられることに相当する。
 例えば、表示ユニット5をZ方向に沿って正面から見るとする。この場合、上段右端の表示パネル12の左下隅の位置に構成されるZ位置決め機構85(当接用凸部46及び支持凸部37)は、上段の右から2番目の表示パネル12の右下隅の位置に構成されるZ位置決め機構85(当接用凸部46及び支持凸部37)と近接する。また、下段右端の表示パネル12の左上隅の位置に構成されるZ位置決め機構85(当接用凸部46及び支持凸部37)と近接する。また、下段の右から2番目の表示パネル12の右上隅の位置に構成されるZ位置決め機構85(当接用凸部46及び支持凸部37)と近接する。
 このように、互いに隣接する表示モジュール9に対して、Z位置決め機構85(当接用凸部46及び支持凸部37)を近接するように設置する。これにより、公差αによる表示面53のZ方向の位置の変動が十分に抑制することが可能となる。
 もちろん、公差αが発生する場合に限定されず、経年劣化や温度変化等により、Z位置決め機構85の基準高さがばらついてしまうといった場合にも、その影響を十分に抑制することが可能となる。
 また、表示パネル12の周縁部58の4隅以外の位置にZ位置決め機構85(当接用凸部46及び支持凸部37)が構成されてもよい。
In the present embodiment, the contact convex portions 46 are configured at the four corners of the support substrate 51. As a result, fluctuations in the position of the display surface 53 in the Z direction due to the tolerance α are sufficiently suppressed. Further, since the Z positioning mechanism 85 is configured by the positions of the four corners of the display module 9, the display module 9 can be stably supported.
Each of the plurality of display modules 9 has the same configuration as each other. Therefore, the Z positioning mechanism 85 (contact convex portion 46 and support convex portion 37) is configured at the four corners of each display module 9. Therefore, the support convex portion 37 is provided close to each other with respect to the support convex portion 37 for the adjacent display module 9. This corresponds to the contact convex portion 46 on the display module 9 side being provided close to the contact convex portion 46 of the adjacent display module 9.
For example, suppose that the display unit 5 is viewed from the front along the Z direction. In this case, the Z positioning mechanism 85 (contact convex portion 46 and support convex portion 37) configured at the position of the lower left corner of the display panel 12 at the right end of the upper row is the lower right corner of the display panel 12 second from the right in the upper row. It is close to the Z positioning mechanism 85 (contact convex portion 46 and support convex portion 37) configured at the position of. Further, it is close to the Z positioning mechanism 85 (contact convex portion 46 and support convex portion 37) configured at the position of the upper left corner of the display panel 12 at the lower right end. Further, it is close to the Z positioning mechanism 85 (contact convex portion 46 and support convex portion 37) configured at the position of the upper right corner of the display panel 12 second from the right in the lower row.
In this way, the Z positioning mechanism 85 (contact convex portion 46 and support convex portion 37) is installed close to the display modules 9 adjacent to each other. This makes it possible to sufficiently suppress fluctuations in the position of the display surface 53 in the Z direction due to the tolerance α.
Of course, it is not limited to the case where the tolerance α is generated, and it is possible to sufficiently suppress the influence even when the reference height of the Z positioning mechanism 85 varies due to aging deterioration, temperature change, or the like. ..
Further, the Z positioning mechanism 85 (contact convex portion 46 and support convex portion 37) may be configured at positions other than the four corners of the peripheral edge portion 58 of the display panel 12.
 当接用凸部46は、本技術に係る、支持基板の周縁部に構成され支持部材と当接する1以上の当接部の一実施形態に相当する。
 また当接基準面48は、本技術に係る、支持部材と当接する当接面の一実施形態に相当する。
The abutting convex portion 46 corresponds to one embodiment of one or more abutting portions configured on the peripheral edge portion of the support substrate and abutting against the support member according to the present technology.
Further, the contact reference surface 48 corresponds to one embodiment of the contact surface that comes into contact with the support member according to the present technology.
 [ユニット基板の接続]
 図2に示すように、本実施形態では、表示装置100が9つの表示ユニット5を有する。表示ユニット5は、X方向(左右方向)に3つ、Y方向(上下方向)に3つ、2次元格子状に並ぶように配置される。
 各々の表示ユニット5が接続されることで、表示装置100が構成される。
[Unit board connection]
As shown in FIG. 2, in the present embodiment, the display device 100 has nine display units 5. The display units 5 are arranged so as to be arranged in a two-dimensional grid pattern, three in the X direction (horizontal direction) and three in the Y direction (vertical direction).
By connecting each display unit 5, the display device 100 is configured.
 図21は、複数の表示ユニット5を互いに接続する接続方法の一例を示すフローチャートである。
 第1の接続ステップとして、複数の表示ユニット5が有する複数のユニット基板10が、互いに接続される(ステップ101)。本実施形態では、9つの表示ユニット5が有する各々のユニット基板10が接続される。すなわち、9つのユニット基板10が2次元格子状に並ぶように、互いに接続される。
 第2の接続ステップとして、複数の表示ユニット5が有する複数の位置決め部材11が、互いに接続される(ステップ102)。本実施形態では、9つの表示ユニット5が有する各々の位置決め部材11が接続される。すなわち、9つの位置決め部材11が2次元格子状に並ぶように、互いに接続される。
 第3の接続ステップとして、互いに接続された複数のユニット基板10と、互いに接続された複数の位置決め部材11とが接続される(ステップ103)。すなわち、接続された9つの位置決め部材11が、接続された9つのユニット基板10に対して、まとめて取付けられる。
 次に、表示モジュール9が取付けられる(ステップ104)。すなわち、接続された9つの位置決め部材11、及び9つのユニット基板10に対して、表示モジュール9が取付けられる。本実施形態では、1つのユニット基板10に対して8つの表示モジュール9が取付けられる。従って、9つのユニット基板10に対しては、72個の表示モジュール9が取付けられることになる。
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of a connection method for connecting a plurality of display units 5 to each other.
As a first connection step, a plurality of unit boards 10 included in the plurality of display units 5 are connected to each other (step 101). In the present embodiment, each unit board 10 of the nine display units 5 is connected. That is, the nine unit substrates 10 are connected to each other so as to be arranged in a two-dimensional grid pattern.
As a second connection step, a plurality of positioning members 11 included in the plurality of display units 5 are connected to each other (step 102). In the present embodiment, each positioning member 11 of the nine display units 5 is connected. That is, the nine positioning members 11 are connected to each other so as to be arranged in a two-dimensional grid pattern.
As a third connection step, a plurality of unit boards 10 connected to each other and a plurality of positioning members 11 connected to each other are connected (step 103). That is, the nine connected positioning members 11 are collectively attached to the nine connected unit boards 10.
Next, the display module 9 is attached (step 104). That is, the display module 9 is attached to the nine positioning members 11 and the nine unit boards 10 that are connected. In this embodiment, eight display modules 9 are attached to one unit board 10. Therefore, 72 display modules 9 are attached to the nine unit boards 10.
 図22~25を参照して、ステップ101の第1の接続ステップの一例について説明する。
 図22は、ユニット基板10を、前方側の右上方から見た場合の斜視図である。
 図23は、ユニット基板10を、前方側の右上方から見た場合の斜視図であり、ユニット基板連結板88を分解斜視図により図示した図である。
 図24は、ユニット基板10を、後方側の左上方から見た場合の斜視図であり、ユニット基板連結板88を分解斜視図により図示した図である。
 図25Aは、ユニット基板10を前方側から見た場合の、ユニット基板連結板88が取付けられる部分を拡大して示す、斜視図である。
 図25Bは、ユニット基板連結板88が取付けられたユニット基板10を、ユニット基板連結板88の中心を通るようにY方向に垂直な面(XZ平面)で切断した場合の断面図である。
 なお、図22~図25に示すユニット基板10は、図19等に示すユニット基板10とは異なる構成を有する。図22~図25は、位置決め部材11が接続されていない状態の、ユニット基板10の図である。
An example of the first connection step of step 101 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 25.
FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the unit substrate 10 when viewed from the upper right on the front side.
FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the unit substrate 10 when viewed from the upper right on the front side, and is a view showing the unit substrate connecting plate 88 in an exploded perspective view.
FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the unit substrate 10 when viewed from the upper left side on the rear side, and is a view showing the unit substrate connecting plate 88 in an exploded perspective view.
FIG. 25A is an enlarged perspective view showing a portion to which the unit board connecting plate 88 is attached when the unit board 10 is viewed from the front side.
FIG. 25B is a cross-sectional view when the unit substrate 10 to which the unit substrate connecting plate 88 is attached is cut along a plane (XZ plane) perpendicular to the Y direction so as to pass through the center of the unit substrate connecting plate 88.
The unit substrate 10 shown in FIGS. 22 to 25 has a different configuration from the unit substrate 10 shown in FIGS. 19 and the like. 22 to 25 are views of the unit substrate 10 in a state where the positioning member 11 is not connected.
 本実施形態では、ユニット基板10を接続するために、ユニット基板連結板88が用いられる。
 図22~図24に示すように、ユニット基板連結板88は、2つのネジ89と、連結部90とを有する。
 図25Bには、ユニット基板連結板88が取付けられた状態における、ユニット基板連結板88の断面図を示している。
 図25Bに示すように、ネジ89は、頭部91と、ネジ部92とを有する。
 頭部91は、円板形状からなる。頭部91は、円形状の前方面、及び円形状の後方面を有する。
 ネジ部92は、頭部91の後方面の中心に、後方側に延在するように連結される。ネジ部92にはネジ山が構成される。
 ネジ89は、例えば鉄等の金属材料で形成される。もちろんネジ89の材料は限定されず、任意の材料が用いられてよい。
In this embodiment, the unit substrate connecting plate 88 is used to connect the unit substrate 10.
As shown in FIGS. 22 to 24, the unit board connecting plate 88 has two screws 89 and a connecting portion 90.
FIG. 25B shows a cross-sectional view of the unit substrate connecting plate 88 in a state where the unit substrate connecting plate 88 is attached.
As shown in FIG. 25B, the screw 89 has a head 91 and a screw portion 92.
The head 91 has a disk shape. The head 91 has a circular front surface and a circular rear surface.
The screw portion 92 is connected to the center of the rear surface of the head 91 so as to extend to the rear side. A screw thread is formed in the screw portion 92.
The screw 89 is made of a metal material such as iron. Of course, the material of the screw 89 is not limited, and any material may be used.
 連結部90は、Z方向から見た場合の形状が概ね矩形となる平板形状を有し、前方面と後方面を有する。
 図25Aに示すように、連結部90の前方面には、2つの挿入穴93が構成される。挿入穴93は、ネジ89が挿入されるための穴である。
 挿入穴93は、円形状の底面を有する凹部として構成される。すなわち、挿入穴93は、連結部を前方側から見た場合に、凹部の底面として、円形状の面を有する。さらに、凹部の底面の中心には、前方側から見た場合に円形状となる貫通穴94を有する。貫通穴94は連結部90を貫通する。
The connecting portion 90 has a flat plate shape having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the Z direction, and has a front surface and a rear surface.
As shown in FIG. 25A, two insertion holes 93 are configured on the front surface of the connecting portion 90. The insertion hole 93 is a hole for inserting the screw 89.
The insertion hole 93 is configured as a recess having a circular bottom surface. That is, the insertion hole 93 has a circular surface as the bottom surface of the recess when the connecting portion is viewed from the front side. Further, at the center of the bottom surface of the recess, there is a through hole 94 having a circular shape when viewed from the front side. The through hole 94 penetrates the connecting portion 90.
 図25Bに示すように、連結部90の凹部の底面の径は、ネジ89の頭部91の径よりも大きくなるように構成される。また、凹部の底面に構成される貫通穴94の径は、ネジ89のネジ部92の径よりも大きく、頭部91の径よりも小さく設定される。
 また、挿入穴93の凹部の高さ、すなわち凹部のZ方向の長さは、ネジ89の頭部91の高さよりも大きく設定される。また、貫通穴94の高さは、ネジのネジ部92の高さよりも小さく設定される。
 これにより、ネジ部92を後方側に向けて、連結部90の前方側から、ネジ89を挿入することが可能である。ネジ89は、ネジ89の頭部91が連結部90の凹部に収まるように、かつネジ部92が貫通穴94を貫通するように、挿入されることになる。
 連結部90は、例えば鉄等の金属材料で形成される。もちろん連結部90の材料は限定されず、任意の材料が用いられてよい。
 また、ユニット基板連結板88が有する各々の面は、機械加工で精密に加工された加工面として形成される。
As shown in FIG. 25B, the diameter of the bottom surface of the recess of the connecting portion 90 is configured to be larger than the diameter of the head 91 of the screw 89. Further, the diameter of the through hole 94 formed in the bottom surface of the recess is set to be larger than the diameter of the screw portion 92 of the screw 89 and smaller than the diameter of the head 91.
Further, the height of the recess of the insertion hole 93, that is, the length of the recess in the Z direction is set to be larger than the height of the head 91 of the screw 89. Further, the height of the through hole 94 is set to be smaller than the height of the screw portion 92 of the screw.
As a result, the screw 89 can be inserted from the front side of the connecting portion 90 with the screw portion 92 facing the rear side. The screw 89 is inserted so that the head 91 of the screw 89 fits in the recess of the connecting portion 90 and the screw portion 92 penetrates the through hole 94.
The connecting portion 90 is formed of a metal material such as iron. Of course, the material of the connecting portion 90 is not limited, and any material may be used.
Further, each surface of the unit substrate connecting plate 88 is formed as a machined surface precisely machined by machining.
 ユニット基板10には、連結板取付穴95が構成される。連結板取付穴95は、ユニット基板連結板88を取付けるための穴である。
 例えば連結板取付穴95は、ユニット基板10の辺上に構成される。図22及び図23に示す例では、左方側のユニット基板10の右辺の上方に2つの連結板取付穴95が構成されている。また、右方側のユニット基板10の左辺の上方に2つの連結板取付穴95が構成されている。左方側と右方側のユニット基板をまたぐように、隣接する各々の連結板取付穴95に対してユニット基板連結板88が取付けられている。
 また、図22及び図23においてはユニット基板連結板88が取付けられていないが、2つのユニット基板10の上辺にも連結板取付穴95が構成されている。上辺の連結板取付穴95は、各々のユニット基板10の上方側にユニット基板10を接続するために構成される。このように、ユニット基板10には、上下左右にユニット基板10を接続するために、4辺全てに連結板取付穴95が構成される。
The unit board 10 is configured with a connecting plate mounting hole 95. The connecting plate mounting hole 95 is a hole for mounting the unit board connecting plate 88.
For example, the connecting plate mounting hole 95 is configured on the side of the unit substrate 10. In the example shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, two connecting plate mounting holes 95 are configured above the right side of the unit substrate 10 on the left side. Further, two connecting plate mounting holes 95 are configured above the left side of the unit substrate 10 on the right side. The unit board connecting plate 88 is mounted to each of the adjacent connecting board mounting holes 95 so as to straddle the left side and the right side unit boards.
Further, although the unit board connecting plate 88 is not attached in FIGS. 22 and 23, the connecting plate mounting holes 95 are also formed on the upper sides of the two unit boards 10. The connecting plate mounting hole 95 on the upper side is configured to connect the unit board 10 to the upper side of each unit board 10. In this way, the unit board 10 is provided with connecting plate mounting holes 95 on all four sides in order to connect the unit board 10 vertically and horizontally.
 図22及び図23に示すように、例えば連結板取付穴95は、ユニット基板10の辺上に、凹部として構成される。以下、凹部を構成する面のうち、Z方向に垂直な面を凹部の底面と表現し、底面以外の面を凹部の側面と表現することがある。
 連結板取付穴95は、凹部の底面及び側面の各々が、機械加工で精密に加工された加工面として形成される。
As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, for example, the connecting plate mounting hole 95 is configured as a recess on the side of the unit substrate 10. Hereinafter, among the surfaces constituting the recess, the surface perpendicular to the Z direction may be expressed as the bottom surface of the recess, and the surface other than the bottom surface may be expressed as the side surface of the recess.
The connecting plate mounting hole 95 is formed as a machined surface in which each of the bottom surface and the side surface of the recess is precisely machined.
 図23に示すように、右方側と左方側とのユニット基板10を並べると、各々の連結板取付穴95同士が隣接し、並べられた2つのユニット基板10上に、底面が矩形となる凹部が形成される。本実施形態では、ユニット基板10を並べた場合に形成される凹部に、ユニット基板連結板88が挿入される。図22に示すように、ユニット基板連結板88は、X方向に概ね隙間なく、Y方向に隙間を持って挿入される。 As shown in FIG. 23, when the unit boards 10 on the right side and the left side are arranged side by side, the connecting plate mounting holes 95 are adjacent to each other, and the bottom surface is rectangular on the two unit boards 10 arranged side by side. A recess is formed. In the present embodiment, the unit substrate connecting plate 88 is inserted into the recess formed when the unit substrates 10 are arranged side by side. As shown in FIG. 22, the unit substrate connecting plate 88 is inserted with a gap in the Y direction without a gap in the X direction.
 図25Bに示すように、連結板取付穴95には、ネジ山96が構成される。ネジ山96は、ユニット基板連結板88が有するネジ89の、ネジ部92と嵌合するために構成される。ネジ山96は、連結板取付穴95の凹部の底面の、Y方向に沿って中央よりも下方側に形成される。また、ユニット基板連結板88が取付けられた場合に、連結部90の貫通穴94と、ネジ山96との、X方向及びY方向の位置が略等しくなるように、ネジ山96が構成される。
 もちろん、ネジ山96はネジ部92と嵌合可能な形状に形成される。
As shown in FIG. 25B, a screw thread 96 is formed in the connecting plate mounting hole 95. The screw thread 96 is configured to fit the screw portion 92 of the screw 89 of the unit board connecting plate 88. The screw thread 96 is formed on the bottom surface of the recess of the connecting plate mounting hole 95 on the lower side of the center along the Y direction. Further, when the unit board connecting plate 88 is attached, the screw thread 96 is configured so that the positions of the through hole 94 of the connecting portion 90 and the screw thread 96 in the X direction and the Y direction are substantially equal to each other. ..
Of course, the screw thread 96 is formed in a shape that can be fitted with the screw portion 92.
 図25Aには、連結板取付穴95にユニット基板連結板88が取付けられた状態における、ユニット基板連結板88を表示面53側から見た場合の拡大図を示している。図25Aに示すように、連結板取付穴95の下部に、ユニット基板連結板88の連結部90が挿入され、連結部90に2つのネジ89が挿入される。
 図25Bに示すように、連結部90の貫通穴94に、ネジ89のネジ部92が挿入され、連結部90を貫通する。連結部90を貫通したネジ部92は、延在する連結板取付穴95のネジ山96に挿入され、嵌合される。
 このようにして、2つのユニット基板10に対して、ユニット基板連結板88が固定される。これにより、2つのユニット基板10が互いに接続される。同様にして、ユニット基板10を上下方向にも接続することが可能である。従って、複数のユニット基板10を2次元格子状に並べて接続することが可能である。
FIG. 25A shows an enlarged view of the unit board connecting plate 88 as viewed from the display surface 53 side in a state where the unit board connecting plate 88 is mounted in the connecting plate mounting hole 95. As shown in FIG. 25A, the connecting portion 90 of the unit board connecting plate 88 is inserted into the lower portion of the connecting plate mounting hole 95, and two screws 89 are inserted into the connecting portion 90.
As shown in FIG. 25B, the screw portion 92 of the screw 89 is inserted into the through hole 94 of the connecting portion 90 and penetrates the connecting portion 90. The threaded portion 92 penetrating the connecting portion 90 is inserted into and fitted into the thread 96 of the extending connecting plate mounting hole 95.
In this way, the unit board connecting plate 88 is fixed to the two unit boards 10. As a result, the two unit boards 10 are connected to each other. Similarly, the unit substrate 10 can be connected in the vertical direction as well. Therefore, it is possible to connect a plurality of unit substrates 10 side by side in a two-dimensional grid pattern.
 また、ユニット基板連結板88が有する各々の面、及び連結板取付穴95の、凹部の底面や側面は、機械加工で精密に加工された加工面として形成される。従って、ユニット基板10を接続した場合に、各々のユニット基板10の高さを高い精度でそろえることが可能となる。
 ユニット基板連結板88は、本技術に係る、互いに隣接する2つの表示ユニットが有する互いに隣接する2つの支持部材を連結する第1の連結部材の一実施形態に相当する。
Further, each surface of the unit substrate connecting plate 88 and the bottom surface and side surfaces of the recesses of the connecting plate mounting hole 95 are formed as machined surfaces precisely machined. Therefore, when the unit boards 10 are connected, the heights of the respective unit boards 10 can be made uniform with high accuracy.
The unit substrate connecting plate 88 corresponds to one embodiment of the first connecting member according to the present technology, which connects two supporting members adjacent to each other having two display units adjacent to each other.
 図26A及び図26Bは、ユニット基板連結板88の他の構成例を示す図である。
 図26A及び図26Bに示すユニット基板連結板88では、ユニット基板10を接続した場合のユニット基板10の高さを調整することが可能である。これにより、各々のユニット基板10の高さの差異を十分に抑制することが可能となる。
 具体的には、図26Aに示すように、ユニット基板連結板88は、高さ調整ネジ99を有する。高さ調整ネジ99が回転されることで、各々のユニット基板10の高さが調整可能となっている。
26A and 26B are views showing other configuration examples of the unit substrate connecting plate 88.
In the unit board connecting plate 88 shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B, the height of the unit board 10 when the unit board 10 is connected can be adjusted. This makes it possible to sufficiently suppress the difference in height of each unit substrate 10.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 26A, the unit substrate connecting plate 88 has a height adjusting screw 99. By rotating the height adjusting screw 99, the height of each unit board 10 can be adjusted.
 図26Aは、連結板取付穴95に、高さ調整ネジ99を有するユニット基板連結板88が取付けられた状態における、ユニット基板連結板88を表示面53側から見た場合の拡大図である。
 図26Bは、高さ調整ネジ99を有するユニット基板連結板88が取付けられたユニット基板10を、ユニット基板連結板88の中心を通るようにY方向に垂直な面(XZ平面)で切断した場合の断面図である。
FIG. 26A is an enlarged view of the unit board connecting plate 88 as viewed from the display surface 53 side in a state where the unit board connecting plate 88 having the height adjusting screw 99 is mounted in the connecting plate mounting hole 95.
FIG. 26B shows a case where the unit board 10 to which the unit board connecting plate 88 having the height adjusting screw 99 is attached is cut on a plane (XZ plane) perpendicular to the Y direction so as to pass through the center of the unit board connecting plate 88. It is a cross-sectional view of.
 図26Aに示すように、ユニット基板連結板88は、連結部103と、1つのネジ104と、1つの高さ調整ネジ99とを有する。
 図26Bに示すように、連結部103は、厚み(Z方向におけるサイズ)が大きいベース部105と、厚みが小さい調整部106とを有する。
 調整部106は、平面形状を有し、ベース部105の外周部に連結される。調整部106は、ベース部105に対して、一方向(図26ではX方向)に延在するように連結される。また調整部106は、ベース部105の厚み方向(Z方向)における中心の位置に連結される。
 ベース部105には、凹部からなる挿入穴107が構成される。挿入穴107の底面には、貫通穴108が形成される。
 調整部106には、高さ調整ネジ貫通穴109が形成される。ベース部105の貫通穴108と、調整部106の高さ調整ネジ貫通穴109とは、一方向(図26ではX方向)に沿って並ぶように配置される。
As shown in FIG. 26A, the unit board connecting plate 88 has a connecting portion 103, one screw 104, and one height adjusting screw 99.
As shown in FIG. 26B, the connecting portion 103 has a base portion 105 having a large thickness (size in the Z direction) and an adjusting portion 106 having a small thickness.
The adjusting portion 106 has a planar shape and is connected to the outer peripheral portion of the base portion 105. The adjusting portion 106 is connected to the base portion 105 so as to extend in one direction (X direction in FIG. 26). Further, the adjusting portion 106 is connected to the center position of the base portion 105 in the thickness direction (Z direction).
The base portion 105 is configured with an insertion hole 107 formed of a recess. A through hole 108 is formed on the bottom surface of the insertion hole 107.
A height adjusting screw through hole 109 is formed in the adjusting portion 106. The through hole 108 of the base portion 105 and the height adjusting screw through hole 109 of the adjusting portion 106 are arranged so as to be arranged along one direction (X direction in FIG. 26).
 高さ調整ネジ99は、頭部112と、ネジ部113と、胴部114とを有する。胴部114は、頭部112とネジ部113との間の位置に形成される。胴部114は、ネジ部113との境界に構成される、円板形状のフランジ部115を有する。
 高さ調整ネジ99は、例えば鉄等の金属材料で形成される。もちろん高さ調整ネジ99の材料は限定されず、任意の材料が用いられてよい。
The height adjusting screw 99 has a head portion 112, a screw portion 113, and a body portion 114. The body portion 114 is formed at a position between the head portion 112 and the screw portion 113. The body portion 114 has a disk-shaped flange portion 115 formed at a boundary with the screw portion 113.
The height adjusting screw 99 is made of a metal material such as iron. Of course, the material of the height adjusting screw 99 is not limited, and any material may be used.
 図26Bに示すように、胴部114のうちフランジ部115以外の部分の径は、ネジ部113の径と略等しくなるように設定される。また、高さ調整ネジ貫通穴109の径は、胴部114のうちフランジ部115以外の部分の径よりも大きくなるように設定される。
 さらに、フランジ部115及び頭部112の径は、各々が略等しくなるように、かつ高さ調整ネジ貫通穴109の径よりも大きくなるように設定される。また、高さ調整ネジ貫通穴109の長さは、頭部112からフランジ部115までの距離と略等しくなるように設定される。
As shown in FIG. 26B, the diameter of the portion of the body portion 114 other than the flange portion 115 is set to be substantially equal to the diameter of the screw portion 113. Further, the diameter of the height adjusting screw through hole 109 is set to be larger than the diameter of the portion of the body portion 114 other than the flange portion 115.
Further, the diameters of the flange portion 115 and the head portion 112 are set so as to be substantially equal to each other and larger than the diameter of the height adjusting screw through hole 109. Further, the length of the height adjusting screw through hole 109 is set to be substantially equal to the distance from the head portion 112 to the flange portion 115.
 図26Bに示すように本実施形態では、高さ調整ネジ99の胴部114のうち、頭部112からフランジ部115までの部分が、高さ調整ネジ貫通穴109に挿入される。高さ調整ネジ99は、調整部106に対して、回転可能に取り付けられる。
 ユニット基板10が有する連結板取付穴95には、図25B等に示すネジ山と同様のネジ山96が構成される。互いに接続されるユニット基板10の連結板取付穴95には、ベース部105に取付けられるネジ104のネジ部と、高さ調整ネジ99のネジ部113と、ネジ山96とがそれぞれ嵌合される。
 高さ調整ネジ99を回転させると、右方側のユニット基板10の、左方側のユニット基板10に対する高さを変化させることが可能である。これにより、各々のユニット基板10の高さを調整することが可能となる。すなわち、高さ調整ネジ99を用いて高さを調整することにより、各々のユニット基板10の高さを揃えることが可能となる。
 また、高さ調整ネジ99の回転により、高さの微調整を行うことが可能である。これにより、各々のユニット基板10の高さが精度よく調整される。
As shown in FIG. 26B, in the present embodiment, the portion of the body portion 114 of the height adjusting screw 99 from the head portion 112 to the flange portion 115 is inserted into the height adjusting screw through hole 109. The height adjusting screw 99 is rotatably attached to the adjusting portion 106.
In the connecting plate mounting hole 95 of the unit board 10, a screw thread 96 similar to the screw thread shown in FIG. 25B or the like is formed. In the connecting plate mounting hole 95 of the unit board 10 connected to each other, the screw portion of the screw 104 mounted on the base portion 105, the screw portion 113 of the height adjusting screw 99, and the screw thread 96 are fitted to each other. ..
By rotating the height adjusting screw 99, it is possible to change the height of the unit board 10 on the right side with respect to the unit board 10 on the left side. This makes it possible to adjust the height of each unit substrate 10. That is, by adjusting the height using the height adjusting screw 99, it is possible to make the heights of the respective unit substrates 10 uniform.
Further, the height can be finely adjusted by rotating the height adjusting screw 99. As a result, the height of each unit substrate 10 is adjusted with high accuracy.
 [位置決め部材の接続]
 図27~32を参照して、ステップ102の第2の接続ステップの一例について説明する。
 図27は、複数の位置決め部材11が接続された状態を、前方側から見た場合の図である。図27では、互いに接続された複数の位置決め部材11が、互いに接続された複数のユニット基板10に接続された状態が図示されている。すなわち第3の接続ステップ後の状態が図示されている。ここでは、複数の位置決め部材11の接続について説明する。
 図28は、複数の位置決め部材11を、前方側の左上方から見た場合の斜視図であり、位置決め部材連結板118を分解斜視図により図示した図である。
 図29は、複数の位置決め部材11を、後方側の左上方から見た場合の斜視図であり、位置決め部材連結板118を分解斜視図により図示した図である。
 図30は、位置決め部材連結板118が取付けられた複数の位置決め部材11を、位置決め部材連結板118の中心を通るようにY方向に垂直な面(XZ平面)で切断した場合の断面図である。
 図31は、組立治具を用いた位置決め部材11の接続を説明するための模式図である。
 図32は、位置決め部材11の接続の順番を示す模式図である。
[Connection of positioning members]
An example of the second connection step of step 102 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 32.
FIG. 27 is a view of a state in which a plurality of positioning members 11 are connected when viewed from the front side. FIG. 27 shows a state in which a plurality of positioning members 11 connected to each other are connected to a plurality of unit boards 10 connected to each other. That is, the state after the third connection step is shown in the figure. Here, the connection of a plurality of positioning members 11 will be described.
FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the plurality of positioning members 11 when viewed from the upper left side on the front side, and is a view showing the positioning member connecting plate 118 by an exploded perspective view.
FIG. 29 is a perspective view of the plurality of positioning members 11 when viewed from the upper left side on the rear side, and is a view showing the positioning member connecting plate 118 by an exploded perspective view.
FIG. 30 is a cross-sectional view when a plurality of positioning members 11 to which the positioning member connecting plate 118 is attached are cut along a plane (XZ plane) perpendicular to the Y direction so as to pass through the center of the positioning member connecting plate 118. ..
FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram for explaining the connection of the positioning member 11 using the assembly jig.
FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram showing the order of connection of the positioning members 11.
 本実施形態では、位置決め部材11を接続するために、位置決め部材連結板118が用いられる。
 図27には、X方向及びY方向に連結された、3つの位置決め部材11が示されている。
 図27に示す例では、左下に図示されている位置決め部材11に対して、右方側に1つの位置決め部材11が連結され、上方側にも1つの位置決め部材11が連結されている。
 左右方向に連結された2つの位置決め部材11に着目すると、左方側の位置決め部材11の右辺、及び右方側の位置決め部材11の左辺にまたがるように、2つの位置決め部材連結板118が接続されている。2つの位置決め部材連結板118のうちの一方は、Y方向に沿った位置が各々の辺の中央よりも上方側になるように、接続される。また、もう一方は、Y方向に沿った位置が各々の辺の中央よりも下方側になるように、接続される。
 このように、2つの位置決め部材連結板118により左右の位置決め部材11が固定され、各々の位置決め部材11が接続される。
 上下方向にも同様に、2つの位置決め部材連結板118により、位置決め部材11が接続される。
In this embodiment, the positioning member connecting plate 118 is used to connect the positioning member 11.
FIG. 27 shows three positioning members 11 connected in the X direction and the Y direction.
In the example shown in FIG. 27, one positioning member 11 is connected to the right side of the positioning member 11 shown in the lower left, and one positioning member 11 is also connected to the upper side.
Focusing on the two positioning members 11 connected in the left-right direction, the two positioning member connecting plates 118 are connected so as to straddle the right side of the positioning member 11 on the left side and the left side of the positioning member 11 on the right side. ing. One of the two positioning member connecting plates 118 is connected so that the position along the Y direction is above the center of each side. The other is connected so that the position along the Y direction is lower than the center of each side.
In this way, the left and right positioning members 11 are fixed by the two positioning member connecting plates 118, and the respective positioning members 11 are connected.
Similarly, in the vertical direction, the positioning member 11 is connected by the two positioning member connecting plates 118.
 図28には、2つの位置決め部材11が左右方向に連結される場合の、連結箇所の近傍の斜視図を示している。具体的には、左右に連結される位置決め部材11のうち、表示面側から見て左方側の位置決め部材11の右辺の上部と、右方側の位置決め部材11の左辺の上部を中心とした部分の斜視図を示している。
 すなわち、図27に示す、左右に連結された位置決め部材11の、上方側の位置決め部材連結板118の周辺に対応する部分が、図28に示されている。
 なお、図28には、位置決め部材連結板118の分解斜視図も示されている。
 図29には、図28を後方側から見た場合の分解斜視図が示されている。
FIG. 28 shows a perspective view of the vicinity of the connecting portion when the two positioning members 11 are connected in the left-right direction. Specifically, among the positioning members 11 connected to the left and right, the upper part of the right side of the positioning member 11 on the left side when viewed from the display surface side and the upper part of the left side of the positioning member 11 on the right side are centered. The perspective view of the part is shown.
That is, the portion of the positioning member 11 connected to the left and right, which is shown in FIG. 27, corresponding to the periphery of the positioning member connecting plate 118 on the upper side is shown in FIG. 28.
Note that FIG. 28 also shows an exploded perspective view of the positioning member connecting plate 118.
FIG. 29 shows an exploded perspective view of FIG. 28 when viewed from the rear side.
 図28及び図29に示すように、位置決め部材連結板118は、2つのネジ119と、連結部120とを有する。
 連結部120は、平板形状に構成される。Z方向から見た場合に、連結部120は概ね矩形状を有する。連結部120には、2つの貫通穴121と、2つのダボ122とが構成される。
 貫通穴121は、Z方向から見た場合に円形状を有する穴である。2つの貫通穴121は、連結部120を前方側から見た場合に、いずれも連結部120の右方側に構成される。
 貫通穴121の径は、ネジ119の径よりも大きくなるように設定される。すなわち、ネジ119が貫通穴121を貫通することが可能である。
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the positioning member connecting plate 118 has two screws 119 and a connecting portion 120.
The connecting portion 120 is configured in a flat plate shape. When viewed from the Z direction, the connecting portion 120 has a substantially rectangular shape. The connecting portion 120 includes two through holes 121 and two dowels 122.
The through hole 121 is a hole having a circular shape when viewed from the Z direction. The two through holes 121 are both configured on the right side of the connecting portion 120 when the connecting portion 120 is viewed from the front side.
The diameter of the through hole 121 is set to be larger than the diameter of the screw 119. That is, the screw 119 can penetrate the through hole 121.
 ダボ122は、円柱形状の凸部として、連結部120の後方側の面に構成される。
 図29に示すように、2つのダボ122は、連結部120を後方側から見た場合に、いずれも連結部120の後方面の右方側に構成される。すなわち、連結部120を前方側から見た場合には、連結部120の左方側の背面側に、2つのダボ122が構成される。
 連結部120は、例えば鉄等の金属材料で形成される。もちろん連結部120の材料は限定されず、任意の材料が用いられてよい。
 2つのネジ119は、頭部123と、ネジ部124と有する。
The dowel 122 is configured as a cylindrical convex portion on the rear surface of the connecting portion 120.
As shown in FIG. 29, the two dowels 122 are both configured on the right side of the rear surface of the connecting portion 120 when the connecting portion 120 is viewed from the rear side. That is, when the connecting portion 120 is viewed from the front side, two dowels 122 are configured on the back side on the left side of the connecting portion 120.
The connecting portion 120 is formed of a metal material such as iron. Of course, the material of the connecting portion 120 is not limited, and any material may be used.
The two screws 119 have a head 123 and a screw portion 124.
 本実施形態では、位置決め部材11に板金125が接続される。X方向及びY方向における板金125の位置と略等しい位置に、位置決め部材連結板118が接続される。
 板金125は、平板形状に構成される。Z方向から見た場合に、板金125は概ね矩形状を有する。図28に示すように、例えば板金125は、左方側の位置決め部材11の右辺上の、上部に接続される。また、右方側の位置決め部材11左辺上の上部にも、板金125が接続される。
 板金125は、例えばアルミニウム等の金属材料で形成される。もちろん板金125の材料は限定されず、任意の材料が用いられてよい。また、板金125は、位置決め部材11と一体的に形成されることで、位置決め部材11に構成されてもよい。
In this embodiment, the sheet metal 125 is connected to the positioning member 11. The positioning member connecting plate 118 is connected to a position substantially equal to the position of the sheet metal 125 in the X direction and the Y direction.
The sheet metal 125 is configured in a flat plate shape. When viewed from the Z direction, the sheet metal 125 has a substantially rectangular shape. As shown in FIG. 28, for example, the sheet metal 125 is connected to the upper part on the right side of the positioning member 11 on the left side. Further, the sheet metal 125 is also connected to the upper part on the left side of the positioning member 11 on the right side.
The sheet metal 125 is made of a metal material such as aluminum. Of course, the material of the sheet metal 125 is not limited, and any material may be used. Further, the sheet metal 125 may be configured as the positioning member 11 by being integrally formed with the positioning member 11.
 図28に示すように、各々の位置決め部材11に接続された板金125には、それぞれ2つの嵌合穴が構成される。左方側の位置決め部材11に接続された板金125には、ダボ用嵌合穴126が2つ構成される。また、右方側の位置決め部材11に接続された板金125には、ネジ用嵌合穴127が2つ構成される。
 ダボ用嵌合穴126は、ダボ122と嵌合するための穴である。左方側の位置決め部材11に接続された板金125には、上下に2つのダボ用嵌合穴126が構成される。
 ダボ用嵌合穴126の径は、ダボ122の径と略等しくなるように設定される。これにより、ダボ122はX方向及びY方向に概ね隙間なく、ダボ用嵌合穴126と嵌合される。
As shown in FIG. 28, each of the sheet metal 125 connected to each positioning member 11 is configured with two fitting holes. The sheet metal 125 connected to the positioning member 11 on the left side is configured with two dowel fitting holes 126. Further, the sheet metal 125 connected to the positioning member 11 on the right side is configured with two screw fitting holes 127.
The dowel fitting hole 126 is a hole for fitting with the dowel 122. The sheet metal 125 connected to the positioning member 11 on the left side is configured with two upper and lower dowel fitting holes 126.
The diameter of the dowel fitting hole 126 is set to be substantially equal to the diameter of the dowel 122. As a result, the dowel 122 is fitted with the dowel fitting hole 126 with almost no gap in the X direction and the Y direction.
 ネジ用嵌合穴127は、位置決め部材連結板118が有するネジ119と嵌合するための穴である。ダボ用嵌合穴126と同様に、2つのネジ用嵌合穴127も、右方側の位置決め部材11に接続された板金125の上下に、1つずつ構成される。
 ネジ用嵌合穴127には、位置決め部材連結板118が有するネジ119と嵌合可能なように、ネジ山が構成される。
The screw fitting hole 127 is a hole for fitting with the screw 119 included in the positioning member connecting plate 118. Similar to the dowel fitting hole 126, the two screw fitting holes 127 are also configured one above and one below the sheet metal 125 connected to the positioning member 11 on the right side.
The screw fitting hole 127 is configured with a screw thread so that it can be fitted with the screw 119 included in the positioning member connecting plate 118.
 また、図30に示すように、位置決め部材11には、2つのダボ用貫通穴128と、2つのネジ用貫通穴129とが構成される。
 ダボ用貫通穴128は、X方向及びY方向に沿った位置が、板金125に構成されたダボ用嵌合穴126と略等しくなるように、左方側の位置決め部材11に構成される。また、ネジ用貫通穴129は、X方向及びY方向に沿った位置が、板金125に構成されたネジ用嵌合穴127と略等しくなるように、右方側の位置決め部材11に構成される。
 ダボ用貫通穴128は、ダボ122が貫通するための穴である。ネジ用貫通穴129は、ネジ119が貫通するための穴である。
Further, as shown in FIG. 30, the positioning member 11 includes two dowel through holes 128 and two screw through holes 129.
The dowel through hole 128 is configured in the positioning member 11 on the left side so that the positions along the X direction and the Y direction are substantially equal to the dowel fitting hole 126 configured in the sheet metal 125. Further, the screw through hole 129 is configured in the positioning member 11 on the right side so that the positions along the X direction and the Y direction are substantially equal to the screw fitting hole 127 configured in the sheet metal 125. ..
The dowel through hole 128 is a hole through which the dowel 122 penetrates. The screw through hole 129 is a hole through which the screw 119 penetrates.
 板金125が接続された状態の位置決め部材11に対して、位置決め部材連結板118が接続される。
 具体的には、まず位置決め部材連結板118の連結部120に構成されるダボ122が、板金125に構成されるダボ用嵌合穴126に挿入され、嵌合される。ダボ122は板金125を貫通し、ダボ122の先端部が、位置決め部材11のダボ用貫通穴128に挿入される。
 次に、位置決め部材連結板118の連結部120が有する貫通穴121に、ネジ119が挿入される。ネジ119は連結部120を貫通し、ネジ部124が、板金125に構成されるネジ用嵌合穴127と嵌合する。ネジ119は板金125を貫通し、ネジ119の先端部が、位置決め部材11のネジ用貫通穴129に挿入される。
 このようにして、位置決め部材連結板118が、位置決め部材11に対して接続される。ダボ122及びネジ119の嵌合により、位置決め部材連結板118は、位置決め部材11に対して安定して接続される。
 なお、位置決め部材連結板118により位置決め部材11を接続する場合に、組立治具が用いられる。組立治具の機能等については、後述する。
The positioning member connecting plate 118 is connected to the positioning member 11 in which the sheet metal 125 is connected.
Specifically, first, the dowel 122 configured in the connecting portion 120 of the positioning member connecting plate 118 is inserted into the dowel fitting hole 126 configured in the sheet metal 125 and fitted. The dowel 122 penetrates the sheet metal 125, and the tip end portion of the dowel 122 is inserted into the dowel through hole 128 of the positioning member 11.
Next, the screw 119 is inserted into the through hole 121 of the connecting portion 120 of the positioning member connecting plate 118. The screw 119 penetrates the connecting portion 120, and the screw portion 124 fits into the screw fitting hole 127 formed in the sheet metal 125. The screw 119 penetrates the sheet metal 125, and the tip end portion of the screw 119 is inserted into the screw through hole 129 of the positioning member 11.
In this way, the positioning member connecting plate 118 is connected to the positioning member 11. By fitting the dowel 122 and the screw 119, the positioning member connecting plate 118 is stably connected to the positioning member 11.
An assembly jig is used when the positioning member 11 is connected by the positioning member connecting plate 118. The functions of the assembly jig will be described later.
 ステップ103の第3の接続ステップでは、このようにして連結された複数の位置決め部材11が、連結された複数のユニット基板10に対して接続される。さらにステップ104にて、表示モジュール9が取り付けられ、大きなサイズの表示装置100が構成される。
 1つの表示ユニット5内において、8つの表示モジュール9と1つの位置決め部材11とは、1つのユニット基板10に対して一体的に摺動可能に構成されていた。同様に、表示装置100を構成する表示モジュール9全体、及び位置決め部材11全体も、ユニット基板10全体に対して、一体的に摺動可能に構成される。
In the third connection step of step 103, the plurality of positioning members 11 thus connected are connected to the plurality of unit boards 10 connected in this way. Further, in step 104, the display module 9 is attached, and a large-sized display device 100 is configured.
In one display unit 5, eight display modules 9 and one positioning member 11 are configured to be integrally slidable with respect to one unit substrate 10. Similarly, the entire display module 9 and the entire positioning member 11 constituting the display device 100 are also configured to be integrally slidable with respect to the entire unit substrate 10.
 複数のユニット基板10を接続した場合、自重により複数のユニット基板10が変形する場合がある。このような場合でも、複数の位置決め部材11が複数のユニット基板10に対して相対的に摺動してスライドする。これにより、複数のユニット基板10の変形に応じて発生する応力の、複数の位置決め部材11への影響を抑制することが可能となる。
 従って、例えば表示ユニット5の縦の連結数を大幅に増やすことが可能となる。これにより、表示装置100の大画面化が可能となる。
 また、表示パネル12に対する応力の影響も抑制できるため、表示パネル12の材料に、破壊応力の低いガラスを使用することが可能となる。これにより、表示パネル12の量産性が向上する。
 なお、温度や湿度の変化により複数のユニット基板10が変形した場合にも、同様に、応力の、複数の位置決め部材11への影響を抑制することが可能となる。
When a plurality of unit boards 10 are connected, the plurality of unit boards 10 may be deformed due to their own weight. Even in such a case, the plurality of positioning members 11 slide and slide relative to the plurality of unit substrates 10. This makes it possible to suppress the influence of the stress generated by the deformation of the plurality of unit substrates 10 on the plurality of positioning members 11.
Therefore, for example, the number of vertically connected display units 5 can be significantly increased. This makes it possible to increase the screen size of the display device 100.
Further, since the influence of stress on the display panel 12 can be suppressed, it is possible to use glass having a low fracture stress as the material of the display panel 12. This improves the mass productivity of the display panel 12.
Even when the plurality of unit substrates 10 are deformed due to changes in temperature and humidity, it is possible to suppress the influence of stress on the plurality of positioning members 11 in the same manner.
 また、複数のユニット基板10が変形した場合でも、表示パネル12同士の相対的な位置関係に影響を及ぼすことはない。すなわち、表示モジュール9は、表示パネル12同士が、X方向及びY方向に隙間を持つように取り付けられるが、いかなる場合でも表示パネル12間の隙間がなくなることはない。常に表示パネル12間に適切な隙間が確保されるため、表示パネル12の取り外しを確実に行うことが可能となる。 Further, even if the plurality of unit boards 10 are deformed, the relative positional relationship between the display panels 12 is not affected. That is, the display modules 9 are attached so that the display panels 12 have gaps in the X direction and the Y direction, but the gaps between the display panels 12 are not eliminated in any case. Since an appropriate gap is always secured between the display panels 12, the display panels 12 can be reliably removed.
 また、複数の表示モジュール9は、複数の位置決め部材11に対してX方向及びY方向に位置決めされる。すなわち、表示モジュール9を設置する場合に、表示モジュール9の位置を調整する必要がない。従って、表示モジュール9の設置に係る時間が短縮される。また、表示モジュール9の位置精度が向上する。 Further, the plurality of display modules 9 are positioned in the X direction and the Y direction with respect to the plurality of positioning members 11. That is, when installing the display module 9, it is not necessary to adjust the position of the display module 9. Therefore, the time required to install the display module 9 is shortened. In addition, the position accuracy of the display module 9 is improved.
 位置決め部材連結板118は、本技術に係る、互いに隣接する2つの表示ユニットが有する互いに隣接する2つの位置決め部材を連結する第2の連結部材の一実施形態に相当する。 The positioning member connecting plate 118 corresponds to one embodiment of the second connecting member according to the present technology, which connects two positioning members adjacent to each other having two display units adjacent to each other.
 位置決め部材連結板118がダボ122を有さず、位置決め部材連結板118が、ネジ119による嵌合のみを用いて位置決め部材11に接続されてもよい。例えば、このような位置決め部材連結板118により、左右方向に位置決め部材11が連結される場合には、位置決め部材連結板118が2つのネジ119を有する。一方のネジ119は、左方側の位置決め部材11に構成された板金125の、ネジ用嵌合穴127と嵌合する。また、もう一方のネジ119は、右方側の位置決め部材11に構成された板金125の、ネジ用嵌合穴127と嵌合する。これにより、各々の位置決め部材11と、位置決め部材連結板118とが接続される。 The positioning member connecting plate 118 may not have a dowel 122, and the positioning member connecting plate 118 may be connected to the positioning member 11 only by fitting with a screw 119. For example, when the positioning member 11 is connected in the left-right direction by such a positioning member connecting plate 118, the positioning member connecting plate 118 has two screws 119. One screw 119 fits into the screw fitting hole 127 of the sheet metal 125 configured in the positioning member 11 on the left side. Further, the other screw 119 fits into the screw fitting hole 127 of the sheet metal 125 configured in the positioning member 11 on the right side. As a result, each positioning member 11 and the positioning member connecting plate 118 are connected to each other.
 また、位置決め部材連結板118が用いられずに、位置決め部材11同士が直接接続されてもよい。例えば、接着剤による接着により、位置決め部材11が接続されてもよい。その他、位置決め部材11同士を接続する方法は限定されない。 Further, the positioning members 11 may be directly connected to each other without using the positioning member connecting plate 118. For example, the positioning member 11 may be connected by adhesion with an adhesive. In addition, the method of connecting the positioning members 11 to each other is not limited.
 [組立治具による位置決め部材の接続方法]
 位置決め部材連結板118を用いて位置決め部材11が接続される場合には、組立治具が用いられる。組立治具を用いて位置決め部材11が接続される方法、及び接続の手順について説明する。
 本実施形態では、位置決め部材11に治具用穴133が構成される。治具用穴133は、組立治具が有するピン部材と嵌合するための穴である。
[How to connect the positioning member with an assembly jig]
When the positioning member 11 is connected by using the positioning member connecting plate 118, an assembly jig is used. A method of connecting the positioning member 11 using an assembly jig and a procedure for connecting the members 11 will be described.
In this embodiment, the positioning member 11 is configured with a jig hole 133. The jig hole 133 is a hole for fitting with the pin member of the assembly jig.
 組立治具は、位置決め部材11を接続する場合に、位置決め部材11を固定するために用いられる。組立治具の具体的な形状については限定されず、位置決め部材11の接続が可能なように設計された、任意の組立治具が採用されてよい。
 本実施形態では、組立治具は、ピン部材を有する。
The assembly jig is used to fix the positioning member 11 when connecting the positioning member 11. The specific shape of the assembly jig is not limited, and any assembly jig designed so that the positioning member 11 can be connected may be adopted.
In this embodiment, the assembly jig has a pin member.
 位置決め部材11には、治具用穴133が構成される。
 図27に示すように、1つの位置決め部材11に対して、2つの治具用穴133が構成される。
 2つの治具用穴133のうちの一方は、位置決め部材11の中央リブ部17上の、最も左側に構成される仕切りリブ部18の近傍に構成される。もう一方は、位置決め部材11の中央リブ部17上の、最も右側に構成される仕切りリブ部18の近傍に構成される。
 治具用穴133は、Z方向から見た場合に円形状を有する穴である。本実施形態では、治具用穴133は位置決め部材11を貫通する穴であるが、治具用穴133がZ方向から見た場合に円形状を有する凹部であってもよい。
 治具用穴133の径は、組立治具が有するピン部材の径と略等しくなるように設定される。すなわち、治具用穴133とピン部材とは、X方向及びY方向に概ね隙間なく嵌合される。
The positioning member 11 is configured with a jig hole 133.
As shown in FIG. 27, two jig holes 133 are configured for one positioning member 11.
One of the two jig holes 133 is configured in the vicinity of the leftmost partition rib portion 18 on the central rib portion 17 of the positioning member 11. The other is configured on the central rib portion 17 of the positioning member 11 in the vicinity of the partition rib portion 18 configured on the far right side.
The jig hole 133 is a hole having a circular shape when viewed from the Z direction. In the present embodiment, the jig hole 133 is a hole penetrating the positioning member 11, but the jig hole 133 may be a concave portion having a circular shape when viewed from the Z direction.
The diameter of the jig hole 133 is set to be substantially equal to the diameter of the pin member included in the assembly jig. That is, the jig hole 133 and the pin member are fitted to each other in the X direction and the Y direction without any gap.
 本実施形態では、位置決め部材11の連結方向によって3種類の異なる組立治具が用いられる。例えば、位置決め部材11を左右方向に連結する場合には、左右用治具136が用いられる。
 また、位置決め部材11を上下方向に連結する場合には、上下用治具137が用いられる。
 ただし、位置決め部材11を左右方向に連結しようとする場合であって、新たに連結される位置決め部材11の下方側に既に位置決め部材11が連結されている場合には、左右方向及び上下方向に、同時に連結を行う必要がある。このような場合には、兼用治具138が用いられる。
In this embodiment, three different types of assembly jigs are used depending on the connecting direction of the positioning member 11. For example, when connecting the positioning members 11 in the left-right direction, the left-right jig 136 is used.
Further, when the positioning member 11 is connected in the vertical direction, the vertical jig 137 is used.
However, when the positioning member 11 is to be connected in the left-right direction and the positioning member 11 is already connected to the lower side of the newly connected positioning member 11, the positioning member 11 is connected in the left-right direction and the up-down direction. It is necessary to connect at the same time. In such a case, the combined jig 138 is used.
 図32Aは、左右用治具136による位置決め部材11の連結を示す模式図である。
 図32Aには、左右方向に並べられた位置決め部材11と、治具用穴133と、左右用治具136とが示されている。図32Aに示す2つの正方形は、位置決め部材11を模式的に表している。また、長方形は、左右用治具136を模式的に表している。4つの点は、それぞれの位置決め部材11に構成される治具用穴133を、模式的に表している。
 左右用治具136は、4つのピン部材を有する。左右方向に位置決め部材11が連結される場合には、各々の位置決め部材11に2つずつ構成された治具用穴133に、4つのピン部材が嵌合される。これにより、各々の位置決め部材11が固定される。
 位置決め部材11が固定された状態で、位置決め部材連結板118が接続される。これにより、位置決め部材11が左右方向に連結される。
FIG. 32A is a schematic view showing the connection of the positioning member 11 by the left and right jig 136.
FIG. 32A shows a positioning member 11 arranged in the left-right direction, a jig hole 133, and a left-right jig 136. The two squares shown in FIG. 32A schematically represent the positioning member 11. Further, the rectangle schematically represents the left and right jig 136. The four points schematically represent the jig holes 133 configured in the respective positioning members 11.
The left and right jig 136 has four pin members. When the positioning members 11 are connected in the left-right direction, four pin members are fitted into the jig holes 133 configured in each of the positioning members 11. As a result, each positioning member 11 is fixed.
With the positioning member 11 fixed, the positioning member connecting plate 118 is connected. As a result, the positioning members 11 are connected in the left-right direction.
 図32Bは、上下用治具137による位置決め部材11の連結を示す模式図である。
 図32Bには、図32Aのように左右方向に位置決め部材11が連結された後に、右方側の位置決め部材11の上方側に位置決め部材11を連結する場合の、模式図が示されている。
 図32Bに示す長方形は、上下用治具137を模式的に表している。左右用治具136による連結と同様に、治具用穴133とピン部材とが嵌合され、位置決め部材11が上下方向に接続される。
FIG. 32B is a schematic view showing the connection of the positioning member 11 by the vertical jig 137.
FIG. 32B shows a schematic diagram in which the positioning member 11 is connected in the left-right direction as in FIG. 32A, and then the positioning member 11 is connected to the upper side of the positioning member 11 on the right side.
The rectangle shown in FIG. 32B schematically represents the vertical jig 137. Similar to the connection by the left and right jig 136, the jig hole 133 and the pin member are fitted, and the positioning member 11 is connected in the vertical direction.
 図32Cは、兼用治具138による位置決め部材11の連結を示す模式図である。
 図32Cには、図32Bのように3つの位置決め部材11が連結された後に、右側の上方側の位置決め部材144の左方側、及び左側の下方側の位置決め部材145の上方側に位置決め部材146を連結する場合の、模式図が示されている。
 図32Cに示す五角形は、兼用治具138を模式的に表している。兼用治具138による連結においては、右側の上方側の位置決め部材144の、左方側の治具用穴133に、ピン部材が嵌合される。また、左側の上方側の位置決め部材146、及び左側の下方側の位置決め部材145に、それぞれ2つずつ構成される治具用穴133に、ピン部材が嵌合される。これにより、位置決め部材146が接続される。
FIG. 32C is a schematic view showing the connection of the positioning member 11 by the combined jig 138.
In FIG. 32C, after the three positioning members 11 are connected as shown in FIG. 32B, the positioning member 146 is on the left side of the upper side positioning member 144 on the right side and on the upper side of the lower side positioning member 145 on the left side. A schematic diagram is shown when connecting the above.
The pentagon shown in FIG. 32C schematically represents the combined jig 138. In the connection by the combined jig 138, the pin member is fitted into the jig hole 133 on the left side of the positioning member 144 on the upper side on the right side. Further, the pin member is fitted into the jig hole 133, which is configured in each of the left upper positioning member 146 and the left lower positioning member 145. As a result, the positioning member 146 is connected.
 組立治具を用いることにより、位置決め部材11が所定の位置に固定された状態で位置決め部材連結板118が接続される。これにより、複数の位置決め部材11を精度良く接続することが可能である。例えば、2次元格子状に接続された位置決め部材11の各々の、X方向及びY方向のズレを抑制することが可能である。
 位置決め部材11に取付けられる表示モジュール9の各々の、X方向及びY方向のズレも抑制されるため、高品質な画像を表示することが可能である。
By using the assembly jig, the positioning member connecting plate 118 is connected in a state where the positioning member 11 is fixed at a predetermined position. This makes it possible to connect a plurality of positioning members 11 with high accuracy. For example, it is possible to suppress deviations in the X direction and the Y direction of each of the positioning members 11 connected in a two-dimensional lattice pattern.
Since the deviation of each of the display modules 9 attached to the positioning member 11 in the X direction and the Y direction is also suppressed, it is possible to display a high quality image.
 図31は、位置決め部材11の接続の順番を示す模式図である。
 本実施形態では、図31に示す矢印の順番で、位置決め部材11が接続される。
 なお、各々の位置決め部材11は、平面に並べた状態、すなわち表示面53が重力の方向に垂直になるように配置された状態で、組み立てられる。
 以降、図31に示すように、2次元格子状に連結される位置決め部材11の、上下方向のまとまりを列、左右方向のまとまりを段と表現する場合がある。
FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram showing the order of connection of the positioning members 11.
In this embodiment, the positioning members 11 are connected in the order of the arrows shown in FIG.
Each positioning member 11 is assembled in a state of being arranged on a plane, that is, a state in which the display surface 53 is arranged so as to be perpendicular to the direction of gravity.
Hereinafter, as shown in FIG. 31, the vertical unit of the positioning members 11 connected in a two-dimensional grid pattern may be expressed as a row and the horizontal unit may be expressed as a step.
 最初に、位置決め部材11が1つ、配置される。以降、最初に配置された位置決め部材11を、基準位置決め部材141とする。
 図31には、2次元格子状に並べられた位置決め部材11のうち、最も下方側の左方側から4番目に、基準位置決め部材141が示されている。
 以降、図31に示すように、基準位置決め部材141が配置される列を1列目、1列目の右隣の列を2列目、2列目の右隣の列を3列目というように、1列目の右方側に対して列の番号を表現する。また、1列目の左隣の列を2列目、2列目の左隣の列を3列目というように、1列目の左方側に対しても同様に列の番号を表現する。右方側と左方側で重複している列番号を、必要に応じて、右方側の2列目、左方側の2列目等というように、方向を明示して表現する場合がある。
First, one positioning member 11 is arranged. Hereinafter, the positioning member 11 arranged first will be referred to as a reference positioning member 141.
In FIG. 31, among the positioning members 11 arranged in a two-dimensional grid pattern, the reference positioning member 141 is shown at the fourth position from the left side on the lowermost side.
Hereinafter, as shown in FIG. 31, the row in which the reference positioning member 141 is arranged is referred to as the first row, the row to the right of the first row is referred to as the second row, and the row to the right of the second row is referred to as the third row. The column number is expressed for the right side of the first column. Further, the column number is expressed in the same manner for the left side of the first column, such that the column to the left of the first column is the second column and the column to the left of the second column is the third column. .. The overlapping column numbers on the right side and the left side may be expressed by clearly indicating the direction, such as the second column on the right side and the second column on the left side, if necessary. be.
 次に、左右用治具136を用いて、左右方向に沿って2以上の位置決め部材11が接続される。すなわち、基準位置決め部材141に対して、左右方向に1以上の位置決め部材11が接続される。
 位置決め部材11が接続される個数は、例えば表示装置100の大きさに依存して決定される。図2に示す表示装置100のように、9つの表示ユニット5により表示装置100が構成される場合には、左右方向に3つの位置決め部材11が構成される。すなわち、基準位置決め部材141に対して、2つの位置決め部材11が接続される。
 また、例えば大画面の表示装置100を実現したい場合には、左右方向に多数の位置決め部材11が接続される。その他、位置決め部材11が左右方向に接続される個数は限定されない。
Next, two or more positioning members 11 are connected along the left-right direction by using the left-right jig 136. That is, one or more positioning members 11 are connected to the reference positioning member 141 in the left-right direction.
The number of positioning members 11 connected is determined, for example, depending on the size of the display device 100. When the display device 100 is configured by the nine display units 5 as in the display device 100 shown in FIG. 2, three positioning members 11 are configured in the left-right direction. That is, two positioning members 11 are connected to the reference positioning member 141.
Further, for example, when it is desired to realize a large screen display device 100, a large number of positioning members 11 are connected in the left-right direction. In addition, the number of positioning members 11 connected in the left-right direction is not limited.
 次に、上下用治具137を用いて、上下方向に沿って2以上の位置決め部材11が接続される。
 本実施形態では、基準位置決め部材141に対して、上方向に1以上の位置決め部材11が接続される。
 位置決め部材11が上下方向に接続される個数は限定されない。
Next, using the vertical jig 137, two or more positioning members 11 are connected along the vertical direction.
In the present embodiment, one or more positioning members 11 are connected upward to the reference positioning member 141.
The number of positioning members 11 connected in the vertical direction is not limited.
 次に、兼用治具138を用いて、位置決め部材11が接続される。
 本実施形態では、まず右方側の2列目の2段目に位置決め部材11が接続される。具体的には、右方側の2列目の1段目の位置決め部材11の上方側と、1列目の2段目の位置決め部材11の右方側に、同時に1つの位置決め部材11が接続される。
 次に、例えば右方側の3列目の2段目に位置決め部材11が接続される。
 次に、例えば右方側の2列目の3段目に位置決め部材11が接続される。
 このようにして、既に接続されている2つの位置決め部材11に対して、1つの位置決め部材11が同時に接続されるように、位置決め部材11が繰り返し接続される。
Next, the positioning member 11 is connected using the combined jig 138.
In the present embodiment, the positioning member 11 is first connected to the second stage of the second row on the right side. Specifically, one positioning member 11 is simultaneously connected to the upper side of the first-stage positioning member 11 in the second row on the right side and the right side of the second-stage positioning member 11 in the first row. Will be done.
Next, for example, the positioning member 11 is connected to the second stage of the third row on the right side.
Next, for example, the positioning member 11 is connected to the third stage of the second row on the right side.
In this way, the positioning member 11 is repeatedly connected to the two positioning members 11 that are already connected so that one positioning member 11 is simultaneously connected.
 また、例えば右方側の2列目の2段目に位置決め部材11が接続された後に、右方側の2列目の3段目に位置決め部材11が接続されてもよい。兼用治具138を用いて位置決め部材11が接続される順番は限定されず、既に接続されている2つの位置決め部材11の、上方側と左右方向に位置決め部材11の連結を行うステップを繰り返す、任意の順番の接続方法が採用されてよい。 Further, for example, after the positioning member 11 is connected to the second stage of the second row on the right side, the positioning member 11 may be connected to the third stage of the second row on the right side. The order in which the positioning member 11 is connected by using the combined jig 138 is not limited, and the step of connecting the positioning member 11 in the upper side and the left-right direction of the two already connected positioning members 11 is repeated arbitrarily. The connection method in the order of may be adopted.
 図31及び図32に示す例では、左右方向は、本技術に係る第1の方向の一実施形態に相当する。上下方向は、本技術に係る、第1の方向に直交する第2の方向の一実施形態に相当する。
 左右用治具136は、本技術に係る、第1の方向に沿って互いに隣接して並ぶように2つの位置決め部材を固定する第1の治具の一実施形態に相当する。
 上下用治具137は、本技術に係る、第2の方向に沿って互いに隣接して並ぶように2つの位置決め部材を固定する第2の治具の一実施形態に相当する。
 兼用治具138は、第1の位置決め部材に対して第1の方向に沿って隣接して並ぶように第2の位置決め部材を固定し、かつ、第1の位置決め部材に対して第2の方向に沿って隣接して並ぶように第3の位置決め部材を固定する第3の治具の一実施形態に相当する。
 図32Cに示す例では、位置決め部材146が、第1の位置決め部材に相当し、位置決め部材144が第2の位置決め部材に相当する。また位置決め部材145が、第3の位置決め部材に相当する。
In the examples shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the left-right direction corresponds to one embodiment of the first direction according to the present technology. The vertical direction corresponds to one embodiment of the second direction orthogonal to the first direction according to the present technology.
The left and right jig 136 corresponds to an embodiment of the first jig for fixing two positioning members so as to be arranged adjacent to each other along the first direction according to the present technology.
The vertical jig 137 corresponds to an embodiment of a second jig for fixing two positioning members so as to be arranged adjacent to each other along a second direction according to the present technology.
The combined jig 138 fixes the second positioning member so as to be adjacent to the first positioning member along the first direction, and the second direction with respect to the first positioning member. It corresponds to one embodiment of the third jig for fixing the third positioning member so as to be arranged adjacent to each other along the above.
In the example shown in FIG. 32C, the positioning member 146 corresponds to the first positioning member, and the positioning member 144 corresponds to the second positioning member. Further, the positioning member 145 corresponds to the third positioning member.
 以上、本実施形態に係る表示装置100は、1以上の表示モジュール9を有する。表示モジュール9は調整機構52を有し、支持基板51に対する表示パネル12の相対的な距離が調整可能である。これにより、高品質な画像を表示することが可能となる。 As described above, the display device 100 according to the present embodiment has one or more display modules 9. The display module 9 has an adjustment mechanism 52, and the relative distance of the display panel 12 to the support board 51 can be adjusted. This makes it possible to display a high-quality image.
 また、本実施形態に係る表示装置100では、ユニット基板10に対する1以上の表示モジュール9の各々の位置を規定する位置決め部材11が、ユニット基板10に摺動可能に接続される。これにより、高品質な画像を表示することが可能となる。 Further, in the display device 100 according to the present embodiment, the positioning member 11 that defines the position of each of the one or more display modules 9 with respect to the unit board 10 is slidably connected to the unit board 10. This makes it possible to display a high-quality image.
 各図面を参照して説明した表示装置、表示ユニット、位置決め部材、ユニット基板、表示モジュール、表示パネル、支持基板、調整機構等の各構成、表示装置の組み立て、各部材の接続のフロー等はあくまで一実施形態であり、本技術の趣旨を逸脱しない範囲で、任意に変形可能である。すなわち本技術を実施するための他の任意の構成やアルゴリズム等が採用されてよい。 Each configuration of the display device, display unit, positioning member, unit board, display module, display panel, support board, adjustment mechanism, etc. explained with reference to each drawing, assembly of the display device, flow of connection of each member, etc. are to the last. It is an embodiment and can be arbitrarily modified without departing from the spirit of the present technology. That is, other arbitrary configurations, algorithms, and the like for implementing the present technology may be adopted.
 本開示において、「略」という文言が使用される場合、これはあくまで説明の理解を容易とするための使用であり、「略」という文言の使用/不使用に特別な意味があるわけではない。
 すなわち、本開示において、「中心」「中央」「均一」「等しい」「同じ」「直交」「平行」「対称」「延在」「軸方向」「円柱形状」「円筒形状」「リング形状」「円環形状」等の、形状、サイズ、位置関係、状態等を規定する概念は、「実質的に中心」「実質的に中央」「実質的に均一」「実質的に等しい」「実質的に同じ」「実質的に直交」「実質的に平行」「実質的に対称」「実質的に延在」「実質的に軸方向」「実質的に円柱形状」「実質的に円筒形状」「実質的にリング形状」「実質的に円環形状」等を含む概念とする。
 例えば「完全に中心」「完全に中央」「完全に均一」「完全に等しい」「完全に同じ」「完全に直交」「完全に平行」「完全に対称」「完全に延在」「完全に軸方向」「完全に円柱形状」「完全に円筒形状」「完全にリング形状」「完全に円環形状」等を基準とした所定の範囲(例えば±10%の範囲)に含まれる状態も含まれる。
 従って、「略」の文言が付加されていない場合でも、いわゆる「略」を付加して表現される概念が含まれ得る。反対に、「略」を付加して表現された状態について、完全な状態が排除される訳ではない。
When the word "abbreviation" is used in this disclosure, it is used only to facilitate the understanding of the explanation, and the use / non-use of the word "abbreviation" has no special meaning. ..
That is, in the present disclosure, "center", "center", "uniform", "equal", "same", "orthogonal", "parallel", "symmetrical", "extended", "axial direction", "cylindrical shape", "cylindrical shape", and "ring shape". Concepts that define shape, size, positional relationship, state, etc., such as "circular shape", are "substantially center", "substantially center", "substantially uniform", "substantially equal", and "substantially equal". Same as "substantially orthogonal""substantiallyparallel""substantiallysymmetric""substantiallyextended""substantiallyaxial""substantiallycylindrical""substantiallycylindrical""substantiallycylindrical" The concept includes "substantially ring shape" and "substantially ring shape".
For example, "perfectly centered", "perfectly centered", "perfectly uniform", "perfectly equal", "perfectly identical", "perfectly orthogonal", "perfectly parallel", "perfectly symmetric", "perfectly extending", "perfectly extending". Includes states that are included in a predetermined range (for example, ± 10% range) based on "axial direction", "completely cylindrical shape", "completely cylindrical shape", "completely ring shape", "completely annular shape", etc. Is done.
Therefore, even when the word "abbreviation" is not added, a concept expressed by adding a so-called "abbreviation" can be included. On the contrary, the complete state is not excluded from the state expressed by adding "abbreviation".
 本開示において、「Aより大きい」「Aより小さい」といった「より」を使った表現は、Aと同等である場合を含む概念と、Aと同等である場合を含なまい概念の両方を包括的に含む表現である。例えば「Aより大きい」は、Aと同等は含まない場合に限定されず、「A以上」も含む。また「Aより小さい」は、「A未満」に限定されず、「A以下」も含む。
 本技術を実施する際には、上記で説明した効果が発揮されるように、「Aより大きい」及び「Aより小さい」に含まれる概念から、具体的な設定等を適宜採用すればよい。
In the present disclosure, expressions using "more" such as "greater than A" and "less than A" include both the concept including the case equivalent to A and the concept not including the case equivalent to A. It is an expression that includes the concept. For example, "greater than A" is not limited to the case where the equivalent of A is not included, and "greater than or equal to A" is also included. Further, "less than A" is not limited to "less than A" and includes "less than or equal to A".
When implementing this technique, specific settings and the like may be appropriately adopted from the concepts included in "greater than A" and "less than A" so that the effects described above can be exhibited.
 以上説明した本技術に係る特徴部分のうち、少なくとも2つの特徴部分を組み合わせることも可能である。すなわち各実施形態で説明した種々の特徴部分は、各実施形態の区別なく、任意に組み合わされてもよい。また上記で記載した種々の効果は、あくまで例示であって限定されるものではなく、また他の効果が発揮されてもよい。 It is also possible to combine at least two feature parts among the feature parts related to the present technology described above. That is, the various feature portions described in each embodiment may be arbitrarily combined without distinction between the respective embodiments. Further, the various effects described above are merely exemplary and not limited, and other effects may be exhibited.
 なお、本技術は以下のような構成も採ることができる。
(1)
 画像を表示可能な表示パネルを含む1以上の表示モジュールと、
 前記1以上の表示モジュールを支持する支持部材と、
 前記支持部材に摺動可能に接続され、前記支持部材に対する前記1以上の表示モジュールの各々の位置を規定する位置決め部材と
 を具備する表示装置。
(2)(1)に記載の表示装置であって、
 前記支持部材は、前記1以上の表示モジュールを摺動可能に支持する
 表示装置。
(3)(1)又は(2)に記載の表示装置であって、
 前記表示パネルは、前記画像を表示する表示面を有し、
 前記位置決め部材は、前記表示面に平行な方向における前記1以上の表示モジュールの各々の位置を規定する
 表示装置。
(4)(3)に記載の表示装置であって、
 前記位置決め部材は、所定の位置に構成された1以上の目印を有し、
 前記1以上の表示モジュールは、前記1以上の目印を基準として、前記支持部材に対して配置される
 表示装置。
(5)(4)に記載の表示装置であって、
 前記位置決め部材は、前記1以上の目印として、1以上の位置決め穴を有し、
 前記1以上の表示モジュールの各々は、ピン部材を有し、前記ピン部材が前記位置決め穴と嵌合するように、前記支持基板に対して配置される
 表示装置。
(6)(4)に記載の表示装置であって、
 前記位置決め部材は、前記1以上の目印として、1以上のピン部材を有し、
 前記1以上の表示モジュールの各々は、位置決め穴を有し、前記位置決め穴が前記ピン部材と嵌合するように、前記位置決め部材に対して配置される
 表示装置。
(7)(1)から(6)のうちいずれか1つに記載の表示装置であって、
 前記位置決め部材は、貫通穴を有し、
 前記支持部材は、前記貫通穴に対応する位置に構成された取付穴を有し、
 前記表示装置は、さらに、前記貫通穴を貫通して前記取付穴に嵌合され、前記位置決め部材を前記支持部材に対して摺動可能に接続する嵌合部材を具備する
 表示装置。
(8)(7)に記載の表示装置であって、
 前記嵌合部材は、前記貫通穴よりも大きいサイズを有する頭部と、前記取付穴に嵌合されるネジ部とを有する段付きネジである
(9)(8)に記載の表示装置であって、
 前記位置決め部材は、前記支持部材に対する摺動可能範囲が規定される
 表示装置。
(10)(9)に記載の表示装置であって、
 前記位置決め部材の前記貫通穴の径により、前記摺動可能範囲が規定される
 表示装置。
(11)(1)から(10)のうちいずれか1つに記載の表示装置であって、
 前記表示パネルは、前記画像を表示する表示面を有し、
 前記支持部材は、前記表示モジュールの前記表示面とは反対側の背面部を支持し、
 前記位置決め部材は、前記背面部と前記支持部材との間に配置される
 表示装置。
(12)(11)に記載の表示装置であって、
 前記1以上の表示モジュールの各々は、前記背面部の一部を構成し磁性体からなる磁性体部材を有し、
 前記支持基板は、前記磁性体部材の位置に対応する位置に配置される磁石を有し、
 前記1以上の表示モジュールは、前記磁石と前記磁性体部材との間に作用する磁力により、前記支持部材に支持される
 表示装置。
(13)(1)から(12)のうちいずれか1つに記載の表示装置であって、
 前記1以上の表示モジュールは、前記位置決め部材に対して固定され、
 前記1以上の表示モジュール及び前記位置決め部材は、前記支持基板に対して、一体的に摺動可能に構成される
 表示装置。
(14)(1)から(13)のうちいずれか1つに記載の表示装置であって、
 前記1以上の表示モジュールは、複数の表示モジュールである
 表示装置。
(15)(1)から(14)のうちいずれか1つに記載の表示装置であって、
 前記1以上の表示モジュール、前記位置決め部材、及び前記支持部材により、1つの表示ユニットが構成され、
 前記表示装置は、さらに、複数の表示ユニットを具備する
 表示装置。
(16)(15)に記載の表示装置であって、さらに、
 前記互いに隣接する2つの表示ユニットが有する互いに隣接する2つの支持部材を連結する第1の連結部材を具備する
 表示装置。
(17)(16)に記載の表示装置であって、さらに、
 前記互いに隣接する2つの表示ユニットが有する互いに隣接する2つの位置決め部材を連結する第2の連結部材を具備する
 表示装置。
(18)
 複数の表示ユニットを互いに接続する接続方法であって、
 前記複数の表示ユニットの各々は、
  画像を表示可能な表示パネルを含む1以上の表示モジュールと、
  前記1以上の表示モジュールを支持する支持部材と、
  前記支持部材に摺動可能に接続され、前記支持部材に対する前記1以上の表示モジュールの各々の位置を規定する位置決め部材と
 を有し、
 前記複数の表示ユニットが有する複数の支持部材を互いに接続する第1の接続ステップと、
 前記複数の表示ユニットが有する複数の位置決め部材を互いに接続する第2の接続ステップと、
 互いに接続された前記複数の支持部材と、互いに接続された前記複数の位置決め部材とを接続する第3の接続ステップと
 を含む接続方法。
(19)(18)に記載の接続方法であって、
 前記第2の接続ステップは、前記複数の位置決め部材を、第1の方向、及び前記第1の方向に直交する第2の方向の各々に沿って、格子状に接続する
 接続方法。
(20)(19)に記載の接続方法であって、
 前記第2の接続ステップは、
 前記第1の方向に沿って互いに隣接して並ぶように2つの位置決め部材を固定する第1の治具を用いて、前記第1の方向に沿って2以上の位置決め部材を接続するステップと、
 前記第2の方向に沿って互いに隣接して並ぶように2つの位置決め部材を固定する第2の治具を用いて、前記第2の方向に沿って2以上の位置決め部材を接続するステップと、
 第1の位置決め部材に対して前記第1の方向に沿って隣接して並ぶように第2の位置決め部材を固定し、かつ、前記第1の位置決め部材に対して前記第2の方向に沿って隣接して並ぶように第3の位置決め部材を固定する第3の治具を用いて、前記第2の位置決め部材及び前記第3の位置決め部材の関係となる2つの位置決め部材に対して前記第1の位置決め部材となる位置決め部材を接続するステップと
 を含む
 接続方法。
In addition, this technology can also adopt the following configurations.
(1)
One or more display modules, including a display panel capable of displaying images,
A support member that supports the one or more display modules, and
A display device slidably connected to the support member and comprising a positioning member that defines the position of each of the one or more display modules with respect to the support member.
(2) The display device according to (1).
The support member is a display device that slidably supports one or more display modules.
(3) The display device according to (1) or (2).
The display panel has a display surface for displaying the image.
The positioning member is a display device that defines the position of each of the one or more display modules in a direction parallel to the display surface.
(4) The display device according to (3).
The positioning member has one or more marks configured at predetermined positions.
The one or more display modules are display devices arranged with respect to the support member with reference to the one or more marks.
(5) The display device according to (4).
The positioning member has one or more positioning holes as the one or more marks.
A display device in which each of the one or more display modules has a pin member and is arranged with respect to the support substrate so that the pin member fits into the positioning hole.
(6) The display device according to (4).
The positioning member has one or more pin members as the one or more marks.
A display device in which each of the one or more display modules has a positioning hole and is arranged with respect to the positioning member so that the positioning hole fits with the pin member.
(7) The display device according to any one of (1) to (6).
The positioning member has a through hole and has a through hole.
The support member has a mounting hole configured at a position corresponding to the through hole.
The display device further comprises a fitting member that penetrates the through hole and is fitted into the mounting hole to slidably connect the positioning member to the support member.
(8) The display device according to (7).
The display device according to (9) and (8), wherein the fitting member is a stepped screw having a head having a size larger than that of the through hole and a screw portion fitted into the mounting hole. hand,
The positioning member is a display device in which a slidable range with respect to the support member is defined.
(10) The display device according to (9).
A display device in which the slidable range is defined by the diameter of the through hole of the positioning member.
(11) The display device according to any one of (1) to (10).
The display panel has a display surface for displaying the image.
The support member supports the back surface of the display module on the side opposite to the display surface.
The positioning member is a display device arranged between the back surface portion and the support member.
(12) The display device according to (11).
Each of the one or more display modules has a magnetic material member which constitutes a part of the back surface portion and is made of a magnetic material.
The support substrate has a magnet arranged at a position corresponding to the position of the magnetic member.
The one or more display modules are display devices supported by the support member by a magnetic force acting between the magnet and the magnetic member.
(13) The display device according to any one of (1) to (12).
The one or more display modules are fixed to the positioning member and fixed to the positioning member.
A display device in which the one or more display modules and the positioning member are integrally slidable with respect to the support substrate.
(14) The display device according to any one of (1) to (13).
The one or more display modules are display devices which are a plurality of display modules.
(15) The display device according to any one of (1) to (14).
One display unit is composed of the one or more display modules, the positioning member, and the support member.
The display device is a display device including a plurality of display units.
(16) The display device according to (15), further
A display device comprising a first connecting member that connects two supporting members adjacent to each other of the two display units adjacent to each other.
(17) The display device according to (16), further
A display device including a second connecting member that connects two positioning members adjacent to each other of the two display units adjacent to each other.
(18)
It is a connection method that connects multiple display units to each other.
Each of the plurality of display units
One or more display modules, including a display panel capable of displaying images,
A support member that supports the one or more display modules, and
It has a positioning member that is slidably connected to the support member and defines the position of each of the one or more display modules with respect to the support member.
A first connection step for connecting a plurality of support members of the plurality of display units to each other,
A second connection step for connecting a plurality of positioning members included in the plurality of display units to each other, and
A connection method including a third connection step for connecting the plurality of support members connected to each other and the plurality of positioning members connected to each other.
(19) The connection method according to (18).
The second connection step is a connection method in which the plurality of positioning members are connected in a grid pattern along each of a first direction and a second direction orthogonal to the first direction.
(20) The connection method according to (19).
The second connection step is
A step of connecting two or more positioning members along the first direction by using a first jig for fixing the two positioning members so as to be adjacent to each other along the first direction.
A step of connecting two or more positioning members along the second direction by using a second jig for fixing the two positioning members so as to be adjacent to each other along the second direction.
The second positioning member is fixed so as to be adjacent to the first positioning member along the first direction, and the second positioning member is fixed to the first positioning member along the second direction. Using a third jig that fixes the third positioning member so as to be adjacent to each other, the first positioning member and the two positioning members that are related to the third positioning member are used. A connection method including a step of connecting a positioning member to be a positioning member of the above.
 5…表示ユニット
 9…表示モジュール
 10…ユニット基板
 11…位置決め部材
 12…表示パネル
 13…背面部
 22…段付きネジ
 23…貫通穴
 24…取付穴
 33…磁石
 34、48…当接基準面
 37…支持凸部
 44…磁性体部材
 46…当接用凸部
 51…支持基板
 52…調整機構
 53…表示面
 57…表示パネルの周縁部
 58…支持基板の周縁部
 60…取付凹部
 61…平板部
 66…雄ネジスタッド
 67…雌ネジ
 69…蓋部材
 88…ユニット基板連結板
 118…位置決め部材連結板
 136…左右用治具
 137…上下用治具
 138…兼用治具
5 ... Display unit 9 ... Display module 10 ... Unit board 11 ... Positioning member 12 ... Display panel 13 ... Back surface 22 ... Stepped screw 23 ... Through hole 24 ... Mounting hole 33 ... Magnet 34, 48 ... Contact reference surface 37 ... Support convex portion 44 ... Magnetic member 46 ... Contact convex portion 51 ... Support substrate 52 ... Adjustment mechanism 53 ... Display surface 57 ... Display panel peripheral portion 58 ... Support substrate peripheral portion 60 ... Mounting concave portion 61 ... Flat plate portion 66 ... Male screw stud 67 ... Female screw 69 ... Lid member 88 ... Unit board connecting plate 118 ... Positioning member connecting plate 136 ... Left and right jig 137 ... Vertical jig 138 ... Combined jig

Claims (20)

  1.  画像を表示可能な表示パネルを含む1以上の表示モジュールと、
     前記1以上の表示モジュールを支持する支持部材と、
     前記支持部材に摺動可能に接続され、前記支持部材に対する前記1以上の表示モジュールの各々の位置を規定する位置決め部材と
     を具備する表示装置。
    One or more display modules, including a display panel capable of displaying images,
    A support member that supports the one or more display modules, and
    A display device slidably connected to the support member and comprising a positioning member that defines the position of each of the one or more display modules with respect to the support member.
  2.  請求項1に記載の表示装置であって、
     前記支持部材は、前記1以上の表示モジュールを摺動可能に支持する
     表示装置。
    The display device according to claim 1.
    The support member is a display device that slidably supports one or more display modules.
  3.  請求項1に記載の表示装置であって、
     前記表示パネルは、前記画像を表示する表示面を有し、
     前記位置決め部材は、前記表示面に平行な方向における前記1以上の表示モジュールの各々の位置を規定する
     表示装置。
    The display device according to claim 1.
    The display panel has a display surface for displaying the image.
    The positioning member is a display device that defines the position of each of the one or more display modules in a direction parallel to the display surface.
  4.  請求項3に記載の表示装置であって、
     前記位置決め部材は、所定の位置に構成された1以上の目印を有し、
     前記1以上の表示モジュールは、前記1以上の目印を基準として、前記支持部材に対して配置される
     表示装置。
    The display device according to claim 3.
    The positioning member has one or more marks configured at predetermined positions.
    The one or more display modules are display devices arranged with respect to the support member with reference to the one or more marks.
  5.  請求項4に記載の表示装置であって、
     前記位置決め部材は、前記1以上の目印として、1以上の位置決め穴を有し、
     前記1以上の表示モジュールの各々は、ピン部材を有し、前記ピン部材が前記位置決め穴と嵌合するように、前記支持基板に対して配置される
     表示装置。
    The display device according to claim 4.
    The positioning member has one or more positioning holes as the one or more marks.
    A display device in which each of the one or more display modules has a pin member and is arranged with respect to the support substrate so that the pin member fits into the positioning hole.
  6.  請求項4に記載の表示装置であって、
     前記位置決め部材は、前記1以上の目印として、1以上のピン部材を有し、
     前記1以上の表示モジュールの各々は、位置決め穴を有し、前記位置決め穴が前記ピン部材と嵌合するように、前記位置決め部材に対して配置される
     表示装置。
    The display device according to claim 4.
    The positioning member has one or more pin members as the one or more marks.
    A display device in which each of the one or more display modules has a positioning hole and is arranged with respect to the positioning member so that the positioning hole fits with the pin member.
  7.  請求項1に記載の表示装置であって、
     前記位置決め部材は、貫通穴を有し、
     前記支持部材は、前記貫通穴に対応する位置に構成された取付穴を有し、
     前記表示装置は、さらに、前記貫通穴を貫通して前記取付穴に嵌合され、前記位置決め部材を前記支持部材に対して摺動可能に接続する嵌合部材を具備する
     表示装置。
    The display device according to claim 1.
    The positioning member has a through hole and has a through hole.
    The support member has a mounting hole configured at a position corresponding to the through hole.
    The display device further comprises a fitting member that penetrates the through hole and is fitted into the mounting hole to slidably connect the positioning member to the support member.
  8.  請求項7に記載の表示装置であって、
     前記嵌合部材は、前記貫通穴よりも大きいサイズを有する頭部と、前記取付穴に嵌合されるネジ部とを有する段付きネジである
     表示装置。
    The display device according to claim 7.
    The fitting member is a display device which is a stepped screw having a head having a size larger than the through hole and a screw portion fitted into the mounting hole.
  9.  請求項8に記載の表示装置であって、
     前記位置決め部材は、前記支持部材に対する摺動可能範囲が規定される
     表示装置。
    The display device according to claim 8.
    The positioning member is a display device in which a slidable range with respect to the support member is defined.
  10.  請求項9に記載の表示装置であって、
     前記位置決め部材の前記貫通穴の径により、前記摺動可能範囲が規定される
     表示装置。
    The display device according to claim 9.
    A display device in which the slidable range is defined by the diameter of the through hole of the positioning member.
  11.  請求項1に記載の表示装置であって、
     前記表示パネルは、前記画像を表示する表示面を有し、
     前記支持部材は、前記表示モジュールの前記表示面とは反対側の背面部を支持し、
     前記位置決め部材は、前記背面部と前記支持部材との間に配置される
     表示装置。
    The display device according to claim 1.
    The display panel has a display surface for displaying the image.
    The support member supports the back surface of the display module on the side opposite to the display surface.
    The positioning member is a display device arranged between the back surface portion and the support member.
  12.  請求項11に記載の表示装置であって、
     前記1以上の表示モジュールの各々は、前記背面部の一部を構成し磁性体からなる磁性体部材を有し、
     前記支持基板は、前記磁性体部材の位置に対応する位置に配置される磁石を有し、
     前記1以上の表示モジュールは、前記磁石と前記磁性体部材との間に作用する磁力により、前記支持部材に支持される
     表示装置。
    The display device according to claim 11.
    Each of the one or more display modules has a magnetic material member which constitutes a part of the back surface portion and is made of a magnetic material.
    The support substrate has a magnet arranged at a position corresponding to the position of the magnetic member.
    The one or more display modules are display devices supported by the support member by a magnetic force acting between the magnet and the magnetic member.
  13.  請求項1に記載の表示装置であって、
     前記1以上の表示モジュールは、前記位置決め部材に対して固定され、
     前記1以上の表示モジュール及び前記位置決め部材は、前記支持基板に対して、一体的に摺動可能に構成される
     表示装置。
    The display device according to claim 1.
    The one or more display modules are fixed to the positioning member and fixed to the positioning member.
    A display device in which the one or more display modules and the positioning member are integrally slidable with respect to the support substrate.
  14.  請求項1に記載の表示装置であって、
     前記1以上の表示モジュールは、複数の表示モジュールである
     表示装置。
    The display device according to claim 1.
    The one or more display modules are display devices which are a plurality of display modules.
  15.  請求項1に記載の表示装置であって、
     前記1以上の表示モジュール、前記位置決め部材、及び前記支持部材により、1つの表示ユニットが構成され、
     前記表示装置は、さらに、複数の表示ユニットを具備する
     表示装置。
    The display device according to claim 1.
    One display unit is composed of the one or more display modules, the positioning member, and the support member.
    The display device is a display device including a plurality of display units.
  16.  請求項15に記載の表示装置であって、さらに、
     前記互いに隣接する2つの表示ユニットが有する互いに隣接する2つの支持部材を連結する第1の連結部材を具備する
     表示装置。
    The display device according to claim 15, further
    A display device comprising a first connecting member that connects two supporting members adjacent to each other of the two display units adjacent to each other.
  17.  請求項16に記載の表示装置であって、さらに、
     前記互いに隣接する2つの表示ユニットが有する互いに隣接する2つの位置決め部材を連結する第2の連結部材を具備する
     表示装置。
    The display device according to claim 16, further comprising.
    A display device including a second connecting member that connects two positioning members adjacent to each other of the two display units adjacent to each other.
  18.  複数の表示ユニットを互いに接続する接続方法であって、
     前記複数の表示ユニットの各々は、
      画像を表示可能な表示パネルを含む1以上の表示モジュールと、
      前記1以上の表示モジュールを支持する支持部材と、
      前記支持部材に摺動可能に接続され、前記支持部材に対する前記1以上の表示モジュールの各々の位置を規定する位置決め部材と
     を有し、
     前記複数の表示ユニットが有する複数の支持部材を互いに接続する第1の接続ステップと、
     前記複数の表示ユニットが有する複数の位置決め部材を互いに接続する第2の接続ステップと、
     互いに接続された前記複数の支持部材と、互いに接続された前記複数の位置決め部材とを接続する第3の接続ステップと
     を含む接続方法。
    It is a connection method that connects multiple display units to each other.
    Each of the plurality of display units
    One or more display modules, including a display panel capable of displaying images,
    A support member that supports the one or more display modules, and
    It has a positioning member that is slidably connected to the support member and defines the position of each of the one or more display modules with respect to the support member.
    A first connection step for connecting a plurality of support members of the plurality of display units to each other,
    A second connection step for connecting a plurality of positioning members included in the plurality of display units to each other,
    A connection method including a third connection step for connecting the plurality of support members connected to each other and the plurality of positioning members connected to each other.
  19.  請求項18に記載の接続方法であって、
     前記第2の接続ステップは、前記複数の位置決め部材を、第1の方向、及び前記第1の方向に直交する第2の方向の各々に沿って、格子状に接続する
     接続方法。
    The connection method according to claim 18.
    The second connection step is a connection method in which the plurality of positioning members are connected in a grid pattern along each of a first direction and a second direction orthogonal to the first direction.
  20.  請求項19に記載の接続方法であって、
     前記第2の接続ステップは、
     前記第1の方向に沿って互いに隣接して並ぶように2つの位置決め部材を固定する第1の治具を用いて、前記第1の方向に沿って2以上の位置決め部材を接続するステップと、
     前記第2の方向に沿って互いに隣接して並ぶように2つの位置決め部材を固定する第2の治具を用いて、前記第2の方向に沿って2以上の位置決め部材を接続するステップと、
     第1の位置決め部材に対して前記第1の方向に沿って隣接して並ぶように第2の位置決め部材を固定し、かつ、前記第1の位置決め部材に対して前記第2の方向に沿って隣接して並ぶように第3の位置決め部材を固定する第3の治具を用いて、前記第2の位置決め部材及び前記第3の位置決め部材の関係となる2つの位置決め部材に対して前記第1の位置決め部材となる位置決め部材を接続するステップと
     を含む
     接続方法。
    The connection method according to claim 19.
    The second connection step is
    A step of connecting two or more positioning members along the first direction by using a first jig for fixing the two positioning members so as to be adjacent to each other along the first direction.
    A step of connecting two or more positioning members along the second direction by using a second jig for fixing the two positioning members so as to be adjacent to each other along the second direction.
    The second positioning member is fixed so as to be adjacent to the first positioning member along the first direction, and the second positioning member is fixed to the first positioning member along the second direction. Using a third jig that fixes the third positioning member so as to be adjacent to each other, the first positioning member and the two positioning members that are related to the third positioning member are used. A connection method including a step of connecting a positioning member to be a positioning member of the above.
PCT/JP2021/036070 2020-10-07 2021-09-30 Display device and connecting method WO2022075163A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2022555409A JPWO2022075163A1 (en) 2020-10-07 2021-09-30

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2020-169972 2020-10-07
JP2020169972 2020-10-07

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022075163A1 true WO2022075163A1 (en) 2022-04-14

Family

ID=81125973

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2021/036070 WO2022075163A1 (en) 2020-10-07 2021-09-30 Display device and connecting method

Country Status (2)

Country Link
JP (1) JPWO2022075163A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2022075163A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114743468A (en) * 2022-05-06 2022-07-12 Tcl华星光电技术有限公司 Splicing device and spliced display

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20170006727A1 (en) * 2015-06-24 2017-01-05 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Display module, display device and methods of assembling and disassembling display module
JP2017211400A (en) * 2016-05-23 2017-11-30 三菱電機株式会社 Display device
JP2018506748A (en) * 2014-12-29 2018-03-08 プレイナー システムス インコーポレーテッドPlanar Systems, Incorporated Mount for concealing magnetic induction positioning means
WO2019116524A1 (en) * 2017-12-15 2019-06-20 三菱電機株式会社 Image display device and multi-display system
WO2020040383A1 (en) * 2018-08-23 2020-02-27 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Display apparatus and disassembling method thereof
US20200068726A1 (en) * 2018-08-24 2020-02-27 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Display apparatus

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2018506748A (en) * 2014-12-29 2018-03-08 プレイナー システムス インコーポレーテッドPlanar Systems, Incorporated Mount for concealing magnetic induction positioning means
US20170006727A1 (en) * 2015-06-24 2017-01-05 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Display module, display device and methods of assembling and disassembling display module
JP2017211400A (en) * 2016-05-23 2017-11-30 三菱電機株式会社 Display device
WO2019116524A1 (en) * 2017-12-15 2019-06-20 三菱電機株式会社 Image display device and multi-display system
WO2020040383A1 (en) * 2018-08-23 2020-02-27 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Display apparatus and disassembling method thereof
US20200068726A1 (en) * 2018-08-24 2020-02-27 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Display apparatus

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114743468A (en) * 2022-05-06 2022-07-12 Tcl华星光电技术有限公司 Splicing device and spliced display
CN114743468B (en) * 2022-05-06 2023-06-02 Tcl华星光电技术有限公司 Splicing device and splicing display

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JPWO2022075163A1 (en) 2022-04-14

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP7288427B2 (en) Tiled display and manufacturing method thereof
US7626654B2 (en) Display device
WO2022075163A1 (en) Display device and connecting method
JP4899469B2 (en) Flat stage device
CN112309267B (en) Display device and flat bed coupler
JP2015200710A (en) Display device mounting metal fitting and display device mounting fixture
JP6832688B2 (en) Display device
KR20180001949A (en) Display device
WO2022075164A1 (en) Display device, and display module
TW201923725A (en) Sub-displays and methods for fabricating tiled displays from sub-displays
WO2010113288A1 (en) Assembling device for display
JP4449299B2 (en) Substrate holder, substrate tray, stage device, exposure device
JP4962161B2 (en) Flat panel display and manufacturing method thereof
WO2020225907A1 (en) Image display device and method for manufacturing same
TWI446045B (en) Optical adjusted mechanism
US20060050252A1 (en) Optical projection apparatus and assembling method thereof
JP2003150083A (en) Display unit and its manufacturing method, and display panel
WO2018131158A1 (en) Multi-display system and drawing mechanism
CN210955960U (en) Display screen module with radian and spliced screen
JP4602168B2 (en) Air slide assembly method
JP6511180B2 (en) Display mounting jig
JP2008146084A (en) Position measuring and arranging method
US20230317492A1 (en) Deposition mask stage, display manufacturing apparatus including the same, and display manufacturing method using the same
US20230038699A1 (en) Panel flattening assembly and display module including the same
JP2003202628A (en) Light bulb assembly

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21877464

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2022555409

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 21877464

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1